MANUSCRIPT COLLECTION

MS 143
FENNER, FRANK JOHN, FAA (1914 - 2010)

LIST OF CONTENTS by box number and page of catalogue 1
CATALOGUE 13
INDEX 113

Box Number Page

BOX 1

43/1. Curriculum vitae and list of publications 13

143/2. Family history 13

143/3. Personal history, from childhood to 1940 14
143/3/1. 1914 to 1932 14
143/3/2. 1933 to 1939 14

143/4. Army experience, June 1940 to February 1946 16
143/4/1. Official War Records and Pay Books 16
143/4/2. Woodside, 12 June to 27 December 1940 16
143/4/3. Middle East, 28 December 1940 to 6 April 1942 17
143/4/4. Telegram and letter from Middle East to Professor Sunderland. 18
143/4/5. Australia, 6 April 1942 to 15 March 1943 18
143/4/6. Service in New Guinea, Dutch East Indies and Borneo 19

BOX 2

143/5. War Service and later records of my wife, Bobbie 20
143/5/1. Official War Records, E.M.B. Roberts (Fenner) 20
143/5/2. Award of Associate Royal Red Cross in 1945 21
143/5/3. Testimonials from Brigadier Fairley and Matron-in-Chief Sage, April-May 1948 21
143/5/4. Award of OAM (Medal of the Order of Australia) 21
143/5/5. Obituary notices 21
143/5/6. Photographs of Bobbie Fenner 21
143/5/7. Letters from Frank to Bobbie Fenner when FF was overseas 21
A. Letters, November 1944 and April 1945 22
B. Letters, May 1945 23
C. Letters, June 1945 24
D. Letters, July 1945 25
E. Letters, August 1945 25

BOX 3

F. Letters, September 1945, back in Australia 26

143/6. Work at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, February 1946 to August 1948 26
143/6/1. Correspondence about appointment and account of work 26
143/6/2. Syme Prize for Research, University of Melbourne 27

143/7. The Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research, August 1948 to July 1949 27

143/8. Professor of Microbiology, John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1949 to 1967 28
143/8/1. Appointment 28
143/8/2. Activities in Europe, 29 July 1949 to mid-February 1950 28
143/8/3. Work at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, February 1950 to November 1952 28
143/8/4. Work in Temporary laboratories, Canberra, November 1952 to November 1957 28
143/8/5. Work in the Permanent Building, November 1957 to September 1967 29
A. paper by W.K. Joklik on the Department 29
B. Photographs, FF and staff of Department 30
C. Honours and Awards 30
D. Reports on Study Leave 30

BOX 4

143/8/5
E. Overseas Travel, other than Study Leave 30
F. Lectures, 1957 to 1967 31
G. Book, The Biology of Animal Viruses 32
H. Newspaper and other reports not related to honours and awards 32

143/9. Myxomatosis 32
143/9/1. Correspondence about myxomatosis 32
A. Correspondence with C.H. Andrewes 33
B. Correspondence with F.M. Burnet 33
C. Correspondence with Paul Chapple 33
D. Correspondence with M.F.C. Day 33
E. Correspondence with B.V. Fennessy 33
F. Correspondence with Jean Macnamara 33

BOX 5

G. Correspondence with Henri Jacotot, G.P. Berry, K.W. Finlay and H. Hohmann 33
H. Correspondence with Ken Myers 34
I. Correspondence with F.N. Ratcliffe 34
J. Correspondence with D.C. Regnery 34
K. Correspondence with W.R. Sobey 34
L. Correspondence with L.B. Bull 34
M. Correspondence with Sir Charles Martin 34
N. Correspondence with persons in South and Central America 34
O. Correspondence with Brian Walker 34
143/9/2. The Fibroma Vaccine Controversy 34
143/9/3. Early Attempts to Introduce Myxomatosis into Australia 34
143/9/4. Conferences Involving Myxomatosis in Australia 35
A. Extracts from Vermin Control Conferences, 1957, 1960, 1964, 1968 35
B. Conferences 1954, 1955, 1956 35

BOX 6
C. The Rabbit Problem in Australia, Melbourne 1958 35
D. AMRC Workshop, Rabbits and their Control 35
E. Australian Rabbit Control Conference, Adelaide 1993 35
143/9/5. Articles on myxomatosis in CSIRO publications for the public 35
143/9/6. Myxomatosis in Europe (except United Kingdom) 35
143/9/7. Newspaper comments involving FF, on various aspects of myxomatosis 35
143/9/8. Myxomatosis, by F. Fenner and F.N. Ratcliffe, published 1965 35
A. Initial correspondence with Cambridge University Press 36
B. Further discussions with CUP involving Ratcliffe as a co-author 36
C. Agreement on publication 36
D. CUP promotional material 36
E. Disposal of remaining stocks of books 36
F. Reviews in scientific journals and the popular press 36
G. Letters about Myxomatosis 36
143/9/9. Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests. The History of Myxomatosis. An Experiment 36
in Evolution, by F. Fenner and B. Fantini, published 1999
A. Correspondence with Fantini, June to December 1992 37
B. Correspondence with Fantini, January to October 1993 37
C. Correspondence with Fantini, January 1994 and July 1997 37
D. Arrangements for publication 37
E. Glossy prints and negatives, by chapter 37
1. Chapters 1 and 2 37
2. Chapter 3 37

BOX 7
3 to 7. Chapters 4 to 7 37
8 to 12. Chapters 8 to 14 37
F. Letters from scientists about the book 37
G. Letters about myxomatosis referred to in Endnotes or Footnotes of book 38
H. Letters on rabbit calicivirus disease referred to in Endnotes 38

BOX 8
I. Data from CSL Ltd 38
J. Reviews of Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests 38
143/9/10. Chapter on myxomatosis for proposed book by Myers et al. 38
143/9/11. Chapter on myxomatosis by F. Fenner and John Ross in The European Rabbit, 38
edited by H.V. Thompson and C. King
143/9/12. Popular chapter on myxomatosis for proposed book Australia – In Our 38
Recollection, to be edited by A.G. Austin

143/10. Director, JCSMR, September 1967 to May 1973 39
143/10/1. Correspondence with University administration about appointment 39
143/10/2. Photographs while Director of JCSMR 39
143/10/3. Honours and Awards 39
143/10/4. Reports on Study Leave 40
143/10/5. Transcripts of radio interviews, 1967 to 1972 40
143/10/6. Lectures, 1968 to 1973 40
N. Lecture to the Australia Party, 17 October 1971 41

BOX 9
O. ANU Public Lecture, 26 April 1972, ‘Is there an Environmental Crisis’ 41
143/10/7. Reports on Aspects of Science in Australia 41
A. Last Report as Director of JCSMR 41
B. CSIRO and Medical Research 41
143/10/8. Books on Virology 41
A. Medical Virology 42
B. The Biology of Animal Viruses, 2nd Edition 42
143/10/9. Committees on Nomenclature and Taxonomy of Viruses 42

143/11. Director, Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies (CRES), May 1973 43
to December 1979
143/11/1. Matters relating to appointment 43
143/11/2. Honours and Awards 43
143/11/3. Reports on Study Leave 43
143/11/4. Lectures and popular articles, 1973 to 1979 44
A to B 1. 1973 and 1974 44
B 2. School seminar, Research School of Social Sciences, October 1974 44

BOX 10

C and D. Lectures 1975 and 1976 44
E to G. Lectures 1977 to 1979 44
143/11/5. Report on CRES for Committee of Review 45
143/11/6. History of CRES, 1973-1979 45
143/11/7. Medical Virology, 2nd edition 46
143/11/8. The Australian Academy of Science; The First Twenty-five Years 46

143/12. Papers on SCOPE: Editor-in-Chief, 1976 –1980 46
143/12/1. Correspondence with members of the Executive Committee 46
143/12/2. SCOPE Agreement with John Wiley and Sons 46

BOX 11
143/12/3. Guidelines for SCOPE publications 47
143/12/4. Correspondence with Howard Jones of Wiley, 1977 to1980 47
143/12/5. Promotion of SCOPE publications 47
143/12/6. Translations of SCOPE publications 47
143/12/7. Handover of responsibility as Editor-in-Chief to Dr R.E. Munn 47
143/12/8. Photographs relating to SCOPE 47

143/13. Brief History of the Botany Bay Project 47

143/14. Retirement, from January 1980 47
143/14/1. Correspondence relating to appointments 47
143/14/2. Honours and Awards 48
A and AA. 1980 and 1982 48
B. 1983 48
C to E. 1985 to 1987 48
F 1. 1988, Japan Prize 48
F 2. Nobel Prize proposals 49

BOX 12
F 3. Nobel Peace Prize for WHO, proposed 49
G, H. 1989, 1990 49
I to N. 1992 to 2000 49
O to Q. 2001 to 2003 50
143/14/3. Lectures and popular articles, from 1980 51
A, B. 1980, 1981 51

BOX 13

C to E. 1982 to 1984 51
F to J. 1986 to 1990 52
K to P. 1991 to 1996 54

BOX 14

Q to S. 1997 to 1999 55
T to V. 2000 to 2002 56
143/14/4. Newspaper interviews 57
143/14/5. Transcripts of radio interviews 58

BOX 15

143/14/6. Books (other than on myxomatosis and smallpox) 59
A. Proposed third edition of The Biology of Animal Viruses 59
B. Veterinary Virology, first edition, published 1987 59
C. Veterinary Virology, second edition, published 1993 60
D. Veterinary Virology, third edition, published 1999 61

BOX 16

E. Medical Virology, third edition, published 1986 61
F. Medical Virology, fourth edition, published 1994 62
G. Possible future editions of Medical Virology 62
H. Portraits of Viruses, edited by F. Fenner and A.J. Gibbs, published 1988 62
I. Human Monkeypox, by Z. Jezek and F. Fenner, published 1988 63
J. The Orthopoxviruses, by F. Fenner, R. Wittek and K. Dumbell, published 1989 64
K. Proposed book: Death of a Disease: the Story of Smallpox Eradication, 64
by F. Fenner and D.A. Henderson, never completed

BOX 17

L. History of Microbiology in Australia, edited by F. Fenner, published 1990 64
L 1 to L 8. General arrangements 64
L 9. Chapter 1. The Early Days of Microbiology in Australia 65
L 10. Chapter 2. Teaching Institutions 66
L 11. Chapter 3. Research Institutes and CSIRO 67

BOX 18

L 12. Chapter 4. Diagnostic Laboratories 67

BOX 19

L 13. Chapter 5. Australian Contributions to Bacteriology 70
L 14. Australian Contributions to Virology 71
L 15. Chapter 7. Australian Contributions to Mycology 72

BOX 20

L 16. Chapter 8. Australian Contributions to Protozoology 72
L 17. Chapter 9. Industrial Microbiology, Photographs 72
L 18. Chapter 10. National Activities concerned with Microbiology 73
L 19. Chapter 11. International Activities of Australian Scientists 73
M. The Australian Academy of Science: The First Forty Years, edited by F. Fenner, 73
published 1995
N. The John Curtin School of Medical Research. The First Fifty Years, 1948-1998 74
by F. Fenner and D.R. Curtis, published 2001
N 9A to 9E. Photographs, Chapters 1 to 5 74
N 9F to 9K. Photographs, Chapters 6 to 11 75

BOX 21

N 9L to L 9P Photographs, Chapters 12 to 16 76
N 9Q. Photographs, 17 78
143/14/7. Photographs of FF, alone or in groups 78
143/14/8. Other Activities during Retirement 78
A. Review of ACIAR Project in China 78
B. Consultancy on Risks of Importing Myxoma Virus into New Zealand 79
C. Isao Arita and ACIH 79
D. Celebration of my fiftieth year after appointment to JCSMR 79

BOX 22

143/15. Diaries kept when travelling overseas (except for New Zealand and New Guinea) 80
143/15/1. 1948-49 80
143/15/2. 1953 80
143/15/3. 1956 80
143/15/4. 1957 80
143/15/5. 1957, continued 80
143/15/6. 1963, 1964 80
143/15/7. 1966, 1967, 1968 80
143/15/8. 1968, 1969, 1970 81
143/15/9. 1971, 1972, 1973 81
143/15/10. 1973, 1974 81
143/15/11. 1974, 1975 81
143/15/12. 1960-61, 1977 (note mixed dates) 82
143/15/13. 1975, 1976, 1977 82
143/15/14. 1978 82
143/15/15. 1979, 1980 82

BOX 23

143/15/16. 1980, 1981 82
143/15/17. 1982, 1983 83
143/15/18. 1984, 1985, 1986 83
143/15/19. 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989 83
143/15/20. 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 84
143/15/21. 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 85
143/15/22. 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 85

BOX 24

143/16. Involvement in Smallpox Eradication 86
143/16/1. Informal Consultation on Monkeyox and Related Viruses 87
143/16/2. Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication 87
A. Report of the Worldwide Consultation on the Certification of Smallpox 87
Eradication, October 1977
B. Report of the Global Commission, December 1978 87

BOX 25

C. Report of the Global Commission, December 1979 88
D. Final Report of the Global Commission, 1980 88
143/16/3. International Commissions for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication and 88
other Country Visits Concerned with Certification
A. International Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication in India 88
B. International Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication 88
in south-east Africa
C. Certification Activities in South Africa and Namibia 89
D. Certification of Smallpox Eradication in China 89
143/16/4. Declaration of Smallpox Eradication at the 33rd World Health Assembly, May 1980 89
143/16/5. Articles on the Achievement of Smallpox Eradication 89

BOX 26

143/16/6. Pictorial Guide to Smallpox Diagnosis 90
143/16/7. Post-Eradication Policy; WHO Committee Meetings 90
A. Proposal for a Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections 90
B. Meeting on the Implementation of Post-Smallpox Eradication Policy 90
C. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, First Meeting, March 1982 90
D. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, Second Meeting, March 1983 90
E. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, Third Meeting, March 1984 90
F. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, Fourth Meeting, March 1986 90
G. Meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, December 1990 90
H. Technical Committee on Analysis of Nucleotide Sequences of the Variola 91
Virus Genome, 1992 and 1994
I. Meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, September 1994 91
J. Report of Final Meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections 91
January 2001.
143/16/8. Discussion of the Destruction of Variola Virus Stocks 91
A. 1993-94, discussions between virologists 91
B. Correspondence before the 1996 meeting of the World Health Assembly 91
C. Discussions before and after the 1996 meeting of the World Health Assembly 92
143/16/9. WHO Advisory Committee on Variola Virus Research 92
A World Health Assembly, May 1999 92
B. First Meeting of the Advisory Committee, December 1999 92
C. Second Meeting of the Advisory Committee 92
D. Third Meeting of the Advisory Committee 92

BOX 27

143/16/10. Technical Advisory Committee on Human Monkeypox 92
143/16/11. Report of the Institute of Medicine (USA) Assessment of Future Needs for 93
Live Variola Virus
143/16/12. WHO Smallpox Report Series 93
A. Index to WHO/SE series, SE series and SME series71
B. WHO/SE/68.1 to WHO/SE/68.7 93
C. WHO/SE/69.8 to WHO/SE/69.13 93
D. WHO/SE/70.14 to WHO/SE/70.23 93
E. WHO/SE/71.24 to WHO/SE/71.33 93
F. WHO/SE/72.34 to WHO/SE/72.49 93
G. WHO/SE/73.50 to WHO/SE/73.61 93
H. WHO/SE/74.62 to WHO/SE/74.71 93
I. WHO/SE/75.72 to WHO/SE/75.77 93
J. WHO/SE/76.78 to WHO/SE/76.88 93
K. WHO/SE/77.89 to WHO/SE/77.99 93
L. WHO/SE/78.100 to WHO/SE/78.119 93

BOX 28

M. WHO/SE/78.120 to WHO/SE/78.133 93
N. WHO/SE/79.134 to WHO/SE/79.144 93
O. WHO/SE/79.145 to WHO/SE/79.152 93
P. WHO/SE/80.153 to WHO/SE/80.158, WHO/SE/81.159, WHO/SE/82.160, 93
WHO/SE/83.161, WHO/SE/84.162, WHO/SE/86.163
Q. SE/68.2, SE/68.3, SE/68.7, SE/68.2, SE/68.9, SE/69.1, SE/70.1, SE/71.1 to SE/71.4 93
R. SE/72.1 to SE/72/10, SE/73.1, SE/73.2, SE/74.1 93
S. SME/77.1, SME/77.2, SME/78.1 to SME 78.3, SME/78.6, SME/78.7, SME/78.11 93
SME/78.13 to 78.27
T. SME/79.1 to SME/79.12, SME/80.1 to SME/80.9, SME/80.11 94
143/16/13. Other WHO publications dealing with smallpox 94
A. WHO Technical Report Series 94

BOX 29

B. WHO Weekly Epidemiological Record 94
143/16/14. Australian donation to the Smallpox Eradication Program 94

143/17. Book: Smallpox and its Eradication 94
143/17/1. The Archiving of WHO Files on Smallpox Eradication 95
143/17/2. Early Correspondence about Structure and Authorship 95
143/17/3. Further Discussions about Authors and Publications 96
143/17/4. Evolving Structure of Book, 1978 to 1988 96
143/17/5. Reports of Meetings of the Editorial Board, 1982 to 1986 96
143/17/6. Financial Arrangements between WHO and FF at ANU 96
143/17/7. Correspondence between D.A. Henderson and FF about Book 96

BOX 30

143/17/8. Correspondence between I. Arita and FF about Book 96
143/17/9. Correspondence between Z. Jezek and FF about Book 96
143/17/10. Correspondence with I.D. Ladnyi about Book 96
143/17/11. Clearance of Certain Chapters by Governments of Formerly Endemic Countries 97
143/17/12. Correspondence with Other Experts about Various Aspects of the Book 97
143/17/13. Correspondence with Dominic Loveday about editing the Book 97

BOX 31

143/17/14. Correspondence with Stella Deck about editing the Book 98
143/17/15. Correspondence with John Wickett 98
143/17/16. Chapter 1: The Clinical Features of Smallpox 98
143/17/17. Censorship by I.D. Ladnyi, a vetoed ‘box’ 98
143/17/18. Launch of Smallpox and its Eradication, 18 January 1988 98
143/17/19. Promotion and Sales 99
143/17/20. Reviews of Smallpox and its Eradication 99

BOX 32

143/17/21. Selected reprints of papers used in writing Smallpox and its Eradication 99
A. Reprints and other material relating to the history of smallpox 99
1. General 99
2. Africa 99
3. Americas 99
4. Arabia and Indonesia 99
5. Australia and New Guinea 99

BOX 33

6. China (see also file 143/17/21L, Box 37) 99
7. Europe 99
8. India 99
9. Japan 99
10. Letters relating to the history of smallpox 99
B. Reprints relating to the clinical features of smallpox 99

BOX 34

C. Reprints relating to the epidemiology of smallpox 100
D. Reprints relating to the pathology and pathogenesis of smallpox 100
E. Reprints relating to variolation 100

BOX 35

F. Reprints relating to vaccinia virus and vaccination 100
1. Historical 100
2. General 100
3. Pathology of vaccinia and complications 100
4. Vaccinia virus, strains and history, file 1 100

BOX 36

4. Vaccinia virus, strains and history, file 2 100
G. Reprints relating to cowpox virus 100
H. Reprints relating to variola virus 100
I. Reprints and other material relating to ‘whitepox’ viruses 100

BOX 37

J. Reprints and other material relating to monkeypox 101
K. Reprints relating to the eradication of smallpox 101
L. Correspondence with Jiang Yu Tu relating to the eradication of smallpox in China 101

143/18. Activities undertaken for the Australian Academy of Science 101
143/18/1. Committee on Fauna and Flora 101

BOX 38

143/18/2. Video-Archive Project 102

143/19. Dealings with Florey and the Florey Centenary Celebrations 102
143/19/1. Correspondence with H.W. Florey, 1948-1961 102
143/19/2. Raising money for the Florey Fund 102
143/19/3. Obituary notice and biographies of Florey 103
143/19/4. Florey Stone, Westminster Abbey 103
143/19/5. Florey Centenary Celebrations 104

143/20. Dealings with Burnet and the Burnet Centenary Celebrations 105
143/20/1. Correspondence with Burnet, 1953 to 1968 105
143/20/2. Nomination for the Nobel Prize in 1957 105
143/20/3. Burnet 70th Birthday Symposium 105
143/20/4. Biographies of Burnet 105
A. Letters of request 105

BOX 39

B. Letters to his children 105
C. Correspondence relating to information for biographies 105
143/20/5. Burnet Centenary Celebrations 105

143/21. Selected Personal Correspondence 106
143/21/1. D. Baxby 106
143/21/2. W.R. Crocker 106
143/21/3. A.W. Downie 106
143/21/4. K.R. Dumbell 106
143/21/5. D.C. Gajdusek 106
143/21/6. Z. Jezek 107

BOX 40

143/22. Marks of Recognition other than Prizes and Medals 107
143/22/1. Honorary degrees 107
143/22/2. Conference: Viral Diseases in South East Asia and the Western Pacific 107
143/22/3. Frank Fenner Visiting Fellowship at the Australian Animal Health Laboratory 107
143/22/4. Frank Fenner Research Award and Lecture, Australian Society for Microbiology 107
143/22/5. Fenner Hall 107
143/22/6. Honorary member, Australian Veterinary Association 107
143/22/7. Frank Fenner display, John Curtin School of Medical Research 107
143/22/8. Frank Fenner Medal, John Curtin School of Medical Research 108
143/22/9. Fenner Merit Scholarships, John Curtin School of Medical Research 108
143/22/10. Portrait by Mathew Lynn 108
143/22/11. Life Member of the ANU Endowment for Excellence 108

143/23. Donations, primarily for Scientific Conferences 108
143/23/1. Australian Academy of Science Environment Fund 108
A. Initial arrangements. 1970 – 1983 108
B. Fenner Conferences on the Environment 108
143/23/2. Australian Academy of Science, Fenner Medal for Biological Science 109
143/23/3. Australian Academy of Science, Basser Library 109
143/23/4. Australian National University, Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conferences 110
in Medical Research
143/23/5. Australian National University, for publication of History of JCSMR 111
143/23/6. Other Continuing Donations 111
A. Fenner Hall 111
B. Nature and Society Forum 111
C. Australian Society for Microbiology 111

BOX 41

143/24. Oral and Video Recordings (see 143/10/5 and 143/14/5 for transcripts) 111
143/24/1. Audiotapes 112
143/24/2. Videos 112

CATALOGUE
BASSER LIBRARY MS 143, FENNER, FRANK JOHN, FAA

Copies of all books of which I have been an author or editor, and bound volumes of all journal articles and chapters in books, have already been deposited in the Fellows’ Publications Section of the Basser Library of the Australian Academy of Science. They are listed in the first entry in this archive (143/1/1), and the circumstances of their production are amplified in this catalogue and the papers 'Biographical Details: Frank John Fenner' prepared in June 1981, with supplements in 1991 and 1995, which have been deposited with the Australian Academy of Science.

Although I have periodically cleared my filing cabinet of letters, I kept a number of personal letters and papers that relate to various personal matters, books, appointments, prizes and honours, etc. From time to time, these have been ‘weeded’; some have been filed and deposited in the Archives Section of the Basser Library. Some of the files (e.g., correspondence with H.W. Florey and F.M. Burnet) may be useful to biographers concerned with those scientists; others, to those interested in myxomatosis, smallpox or the history of microbiology in Australia. I have included in the files glossy prints of the photographs which appear in the History of Microbiology in Australia (about 240 photos of microbiologists) and in The History of the John Curtin School of Medical Research: the First Fifty Years (about 200 photos of medical scientists), which might be useful. This catalogue was last revised in 2001-2002, and I have inserted a lot of explanatory information on my personal and scientific career that is not available elsewhere. There is a List of Contents at the beginning and a short Index at the end of the catalogue.

BOX 1
Catalogue, List of Contents, Indexes

143/1. Curriculum vitae and list of publications

143/2. Family history (see also Basser Library Archive MS 178, Charles Fenner)
My father was born in Dunach, Victoria. His father, Johannes Fenner, was born in Neidergrenzebach, in Germany, in 1841, and came to Australia in 1866, first to Coolgardie and then to Dunach, near the Ballarat goldfields. His mother was born in Adelaide, of Welsh parents who had migrated to Australia in 1841.
1. A. Entries relating to direct ancestors of my father (on male side) from Hessisches Geschlechterbuch, with colour reproduction of Fenner crest. The crest is used by Fenner Hall, in the Australian National University.
B. Correspondence between my father and a cousin in Rotenburg, plus summary family tree.
C. Correspondence with my nephew Max Fenner about Fenner genealogy.
2. Australian Dictionary of Biography entry: Charles Albert Edward Fenner (1981, 8, 481-482).
3. Wedding photograph of Charles Fenner and Emma Louise (Peggie) Hirt, 4 January 1911.
4. Photographs of father, Charles Albert Edward Fenner (CF).
A. With FF, while he was at Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, awaiting building of laboratories in Canberra.
B. CF at age of fifty.
C. CF seated at desk as Director of Education, South Australia, about 1940.
D. CF with Sir Edgeworth David, the father of Australian geology.
5. Photograph of mother (née Emma Louise Hirt) in the 1930s.
6. Photograph of parents and siblings.
A. Family, about 1933.
B. Family except Tom (Royal Australian Navy, on service), 1943.

143/3. Personal history, from childhood to 1940.
1. 1914 to 1932.
My father, mother and first child had moved to Ballarat in 1912, where father was a lecturer and later Principal of the Ballarat School of Mines. I was born in Ballarat and moved with the family to Adelaide in 1916, when father was appointed Superintendent of Technical Education in the South Australian Education Department. We first lived in a rented house in North Adelaide, but after enquiries about where the best primary school was situated, moved to 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park, five houses down from the corner store and the Rose Park Primary School. Alexandra Avenue was unusual in suburban Adelaide in that besides rows of street trees along the footpath on each side there was a lawn, also with two rows of trees, separating the two roads. The local children gathered there after school to play cricket and kick a football.
A. Photograph of the house in which I was born on 21-12-14. It was in Dovetown Street, Ballarat, Victoria, at the corner of Eyre Street, next to the house where three of my mother's sisters lived.
B. Photograph taken in 1926 of the Fenner children in the backyard of the house at 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park, Adelaide, where I lived from 1918 until graduating in medicine in 1938. From left: Lyell, Frank, Winifrid, Thomas, William.
C. Newspaper article and letter to father from Mr F.N. Leak, the Headmaster of Rose Park Primary School, when I was given equal top marks (with one other) in the Qualifying Certificate Examination.
D. Photograph of FF at age of 12 years.
E. Invitation to Father and Son Banquet for the Rose Park Boys Club, which held gymnastic evenings each week in the Congregational Hall, immediately opposite our house in Alexandra Avenue. It was here that I became good friends with Lindsay Pryor, later Keeper of Parks and Gardens in Canberra and from 1959 Professor of Botany at ANU.
F. Report at end of first term at Thebarton Technical High School, where I spent the first 4 years of my secondary education. For more about the Dalton Plan, which was the mode of teaching there, see Basser Archive MS 178 (C. Fenner). Also newspaper reports of activities at the school.
G. In 1931 I went to Adelaide High School to try to win one of 12 bursaries for the university. I missed out. I liked cricket and was a fairly good slow bowler. I was hopeless at Australian Rules football, so took up hockey, which led to my selection in the first-grade team as soon as I went to the University.

2. Personal History, 1933 to 1939
A. 1933. Newspaper photo and comment. In 1933 I enrolled in Science, doing full year courses in Physics, Chemistry, Botany and Zoology (in contrast to the abbreviated courses in first year Medicine). I received credits in zoology, botany, chemistry and physical chemistry and was awarded the John Bagot Prize for Botany. I remained a member (later President) of the Science Students Society throughout my university career.
B. 1934. Newspaper photo, collection of photographs taken on Pandi Pandi trip, and a newspaper article on trip. In 1934 I transferred to Second Year Medicine, but took Geology I as an evening course, with Douglas Mawson and Cecil Madigan as teachers. I was assiduous in Anatomy, which then occupied at least half of the time in Second and Third Years, and because of this (and probably my father’s friendship with the organizer of the expeditions, Dr T.D. Campbell) I was asked to fill the place of Hugo Gray (see 143/3/2D) as ‘physical anthropologist’ for the S.A. Museum/Adelaide University Anthropological expeditions. The first of these in which I took part was to Pandi Pandi, to reach which we had to travel over the very primitive Birdsville track. My second scientific paper was on the work I did on that expedition. After my return I prepared an article which was published on the lead page of The Advertiser and later reproduced in one of my father’s books (copy attached).

This trip was an important experience in that it led me to spend most lunch times and other spare time in the basement of the S.A. Museum, in the office of N.B. Tindale, studying aboriginal skulls. Most of my work there, on non-metrical morphological features of Australian Aboriginal skulls, was an extension of work by Frederic Wood Jones, then Professor of Anatomy at the University of Melbourne. He helped me greatly, as evidenced by our correspondence.
1. Obituary notice, Frederic Wood Jones.
2. Correspondence with Frederic Wood Jones, 1936 to 1942.

C. 1935. Photographs: studio photo of FF, photo of Adelaide University Sports Association General Committee, to which I was elected in 1935, and photo taken at intervarsity hockey match at Sydney University. I was centre forward, but missed that goal.
Newspaper clipping, David Thomas scholarship.
D. 1936. Newspaper clippings, letter to parents, letter from Hugo Gray, photo of hockey team.
In 1936 I was awarded the David Murray Scholarship, which I used for travelling to Canberra to study Aboriginal skulls in the Institute of Anatomy (now the Screen and Sound Archive). I stayed across the road in Beauchamp House (then a boarding house and now Ian Potter House of the Australian Academy of Science). The letter, written while staying with an uncle at Yarraville, Victoria on the way back to Adelaide, describes my discussions with Sir Colin Mackenzie, Director of the Institute of Anatomy, about several matters including the controversial ‘Cohuna skull,’ now believed to be in the same group as the Kow Swamp skulls.
Letter (1936) from Hugo Gray, who had been Senior Lecturer in Anatomy but joined Professor Woollard at University College, London, advising me how to proceed if I wanted to take on Anatomy as a career (see also 143/3/2F).
In 1936 I was elected a member of the Adelaide University Union Committee (group photograph).
Photo, Combined Universities Hockey Team, 1936. Because of my experience playing hockey while still at school (see 143/3/1G), I went immediately into the University hockey team in 1933, became captain in 1935, and received a University Blue for hockey in 1936.
E. 1937. Newspaper photos: Lister Prize, Nepabuna expedition. Photos: Adelaide University hockey team, South Australian hockey team, Northfield Hospital, respirator ward, Ralph Tate Society expedition.
Members of the S.A. Museum/Adelaide University Anthropological expedition to Nepabunna Mission in the northern Flinders Ranges, in 1937, and photos taken there.
In 1937 I was captain of the University hockey team and vice-captain of the South Australian hockey team.
Over the 1937-1938 break another 5th year student and I volunteered to work at the Northfield Infectious Disease Hospital to help with the severe epidemic of poliomyelitis. The photo shows the locally designed respirators used for severe cases with breathing problems.
Expedition of Ralph Tate Society, Swanreach, 1937. Inspired by the example of wood Jones' Macleay Society in the University of Melbourne, I tried to organize a similar ‘natural history society’ in the University of Adelaide, calling it the Ralph tate Society, after an early SA naturalist (I was President of the University Science Students Society at the time). Dr Cecil Madigan, of the Geology Department, was the principal staff supporter, and we organized an expedition to explore some caves in the Murray cliffs near Swanreach. Others in the party included Pat Mawson (daughter of Sir Douglas Mawson), Roy Sprigg (hon DSc, ANU, 1980) and Leigh Parkin, later Director of S.A. Geological Survey. The advent of the Second World War in September 1939 put an end to the Society.
F. 1938-39. Newspaper photos: Gosse Medal, Leichhardt remains expedition, Ooldea expedition, 1939. Letter from Hugo Gray. Photo: residents, registrars and superintendent of the Adelaide Hospital, 1939-40.
In 1938 it was reported that human bones, coins and other specimens had been found in the Simpson Desert; it was suspected that they might be Leichhardt’s remains. An expedition was organized to go there and examine the site; I was included as an expert on human skeletal remains. However, during intervarsity hockey games a week before the departure date I was hit on the right knee by a ball and my patella shattered; I had to spend the next six weeks in a foot to groin plaster cast, with about two weeks in a hospital bed.
I had been sending reprints of various anthropological papers to Hugo Gray. He wrote to me again about coming to England for postgraduate study, in any of a variety of fields. The war made those suggestions irrelevant.

143/4. Army experience, June 1940 to February 1946.
1. Official War Records and Paybooks.
Summary, from enlistment to movement to New Guinea. Enlisted as Captain, RAAMC, 10 May 1940, posted to 2/6 Field Ambulance 12 June 1940 and trained at Woodside, S.A. Embarked at Melbourne for overseas service 29 December 1940; arrived in Palestine 31 January 1941. Detached from 2/6 Field Ambulance to 2/4 Field Ambulance 16 to 21 February 1941. Transferred to Headquarters 1st Australian Corps 11 March 1941. Transferred for service in Greece 23 April 1941. Transferred to 2/1 Casualty Clearing Station 6 July 1941. Embarked for return to Australia 8 February 1942, disembarking in Perth on 6 April 1942. Transferred to 2/2 Australian General Hospital as Pathologist 10 July 1942. Promoted Major 10 November 1942. Transferred to Land Headquarters as malariologist 15 March 1943 and posted to New Guinea 23 April 1943. See files143/4/6-7 for service in New Guinea until discharge in January 1946.
A. Official records of war service.
B. Paybooks.

2. Woodside, 12 June to 27 December 1940.
I completed my year as a resident medical officer in February 1940, but instead of enlisting immediately, as did most of my fellow RMOs, I went to the School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine at the University of Sydney, living for three months at St Andrews College. Here I took the 3-month course for a Diploma of Tropical Medicine and learnt much about malaria and other tropical diseases. This was financed from the £200 bonus provided for all RMOs who remained at the Adelaide Hospital for the full year.
A. Photograph: 2/6 Field Ambulance officer's mess; names on back of photograph. Noel Bonnin, pictured here and already a qualified surgeon, was my best friend throughout my period in the Middle East.
B. Experiments on treatment of gas gangrene. While at Woodside training to be field ambulance officers, Noel Bonnin and I did experiments on the treatment of gas gangrene by local use of sulphanilamide, using guinea pigs as experimental animals. A paper was published in the Medical Journal of Australia in February 1941.
1. Correspondence with E.W. Hurst, Director of the Institute of Medical and Veterinary Research (IMVS), Adelaide. I carried out post mortems on infected guinea pigs at the Institute, and inadvertently left some dead animals on the bench over a weekend, for which I was admonished by Weston Hurst. My letter of apology was supplied by Bernard Nicholson (historian of IMVS) in 1989.
2. Nicholson’s letter, which mentions the fact that much later, in 1944, I was instructed by Colonel E.V. Keogh, the Director of Hygiene and Pathology, to apply for the position of Director of IMVS. Fortunately for me, the application was unsuccessful.
3. Letter from University of Adelaide granting financial assistance for the experiments on gas gangrene.
4. Reprint of article (1941) and newspaper comments on it (1942).

3. Middle East, 28 December 1940 to 6 April 1942
A. Letters to my family during voyage to Palestine.
All letters were censored, nominally by the writer if he was an officer, but sometimes again by CO of unit. Letter of 17-1-41 mentions Dr R.L. Spittel, whom I met when we stopped off in Colombo. He gave me a copy of his book Savage Sanctuary. The mention of oral pigmentation refers to an unpublished report written during my university days.
B. Letters to my family written while I was in the 2/6 Australian Field Ambulance, 31 January to 11 March 1941.
Reference to ‘Tom’ refers to my brother (4 years younger) who was an officer in the Royal Australian Navy, at the time in the Mediterranean. Birdsell, mentioned in some letters, was an American anthropologist whom I had met when working with Tindale (Tinny) in Adelaide (see 143/2/2B).
Mention of a ‘bivouac’ in letter 14-2-41 refers to my secondment to 2/4 Field Ambulance for a field exercise. This was an important occasion. We naïve officers had been told by our Commanding Officer, F.H. ‘Teddy’ Beare, always to march with our men. I did this on the field exercise and sent the staff sergeant ahead with the truck and equipment to set up the advanced dressing station. I got to this just as the Brigade Commander arrived and he blasted me for placing the big tent in such a prominent position. I believe that it was this demonstration of my poor performance as a field officer that led to my transfer to Corps Headquarters, which led to my subsequent more interesting army jobs.
Letter 7-3-41 mentions Saul Adler, FRS, who was an expert malariologist, whom I was able to visit when I went to Jerusalem. The trip to Cairo mentioned in the same letter refers to an assignment to travel to Mersa Matruh with an ambulance and staff as backup of the movement of Australian troops to Tobruk. I took time off on the way back to look briefly at Alexandria and Cairo.
Letter 13-3-41 refers to a holiday (7 days) during which Noel Bonnin and I travelled by train from Tel Aviv to Cairo and then up the Nile as far as Aswan. We had a wonderful time – great service because there were no tourists – and the sights were stunning, hence the long letter 17-3-41.
C. Letters to my family written while I was at 1 Australian Corps Headquarters, 11 March to 6 July 1941.
Officers were trusted to censor their own letters, but I understand that for at least some months after embarkation my letters were censored again, because as a fifth year medical student I had worked over the long vacation in the Northfield Infectious Diseases Hospital, where the superintendent was a proclaimed communist.
Because of security considerations some of my letters at this period are somewhat obscure. I had met Colonel Hamilton Fairley (the senior medical officer in the Australian Army and adviser to the British Army in the Middle East – an expert on malaria) while at Corps HQ and he knew that I had done a Diploma of Tropical Medicine (DTM) and therefore knew something about malaria. He arranged that I should go to Greece as a malariologist, but instead I spent about six weeks waiting at a very dusty camp outside Alexandria. During this period I often visited Alexandria and met some very hospitable and interesting local people and visited all the archaeological sites, including the catacombs. The card attached to this file is from that family to my mother. Eventually, when the Allied armies were retreating from Greece, I was sent as a medical officer on a passenger vessel to Crete, to take off civilians who had fled from mainland Greece. We were surrounded by an impressive array of naval vessels.
From later letters in this file it is clear that I was hoping to get a job in a General Hospital. In fact on 6 July 1941 I was transferred to the 2/1 Casualty Clearing Station.
D 1. Letters to my family written while I was at 2/1 Casualty Clearing Station, 6 July 1941 to 10 July 1942.
The Casualty Clearing Station functioned as an advance hospital for the Syrian campaign, first in Nazareth and then in Asfurieh, in Lebanon. During the Syrian campaign and later many troops suffered from malaria and sandfly fever. I established a small laboratory and did malaria diagnoses by Field’s thick film method.
Letter 8-8-41 shows that by August we had moved up to Asfurieh, just east of Beirut, to what was at that time the only mental hospital in the Middle East. Our time there was very interesting. Ted Ford, who had been a teacher at the Sydney School of Tropical Medicine when I did my DTM there in 1940, ran a Mobile Bacteriological Laboratory nearby. He and I went down to Haifa together to hear the Palestine Symphony Orchestra and visited the many ancient villages and ruins on our way there and back. He loomed large in my subsequent work in New Guinea (see file 143/4/6A).
As is clear from the letters, I thoroughly enjoyed my time in Lebanon, being classified as a physician, doing some laboratory diagnostic work, meeting some very interesting local people and enjoying the mountains and the nearby ruins such as those at Baalbek.
Letter 14-8-41 indicates that we were to get 7 days holiday soon. It did not come until somewhat later, and unfortunately there are no letters in the collection that mention that Noel Bonnin and I went for a wonderful trip by hired taxi from Beirut through Haifa and Jerusalem to Amman in Jordan, visiting Jericho and bathing in the Dead Sea, then through Jerash, a wonderfully well-preserved Roman city on the way to Amman. We then went down to Petra, the ‘rose red city half as old as time’, which was wonderful. We drove back along the mountains on the east side of the Dead Sea, past some wonderful Crusader castles, and then through the Druse country to Damascus and up to the castle at Homs before we got back to Beirut.
2. Photograph of building in Nazareth where I worked during the Syrian campaign.

4. Telegram and letter from Middle East to Professor Sunderland
Pencil written copy of a telegram and a letter to Sydney Sunderland, Professor of Anatomy at the University of Melbourne. He had rung me up at some time during my period in the Middle East asking me if I would come back to Australia to be a senior lecturer in his Department. He promised to get me out of the Army, honorably. I regretted, but kept it in mind for my post-war career, hence the frequent mention of ‘Melbourne’ in the letters to my family in earlier files.

5. Australia, 6 April 1942 to 15 March 1943.
I embarked on the Pandit, as medical officer for a transport battalion, on 8 February 1942, and arrived in Perth about 1 April 1942, with a week in Colombo during which a fleet of passenger ships assembled to take soldiers of the 6th and 7th Divisions to Perth and other ports, escorted by a British battleship and several destroyers. At the end of the first day out, as the fleet disappeared, the flagship sent a message: ‘Goodbye, Good Luck’. The Pandit was a relic of the First World War, and its maximum speed was about 12 knots. It took over three weeks to reach Perth, and the Pandit never left there. From there I went to Adelaide by ship and had about three weeks leave with family. I then rejoined 2/1 CCS, which was located in Ipswich, in Queensland.
Brigadier Fairley visited the unit, and suggested to me that I might be given a job as a pathologist in an Australian General Hospital (AGH). Imaging that this would mean six month’s leave in Sydney to learn something more than diagnosing malaria, I agreed. Within a few weeks I found myself on a train travelling, along with many Army nurses but no other men, on the narrow gauge track to Hughenden, in north-central Queensland, to be pathologist for a 1,200-bed hospital. The previous incumbent was E.V. Keogh, who had moved to Land Headquarters to be Director of Hygiene and Pathology, and proved to be a splendid friend. On the train I remained to myself, but noticed a good-looking nurse combing her long hair, which she then braided around her head (see photograph, file 143/5/6).
A. Pathologist, 2/2 Australian General Hospital.
2/2 AGH was located at Watten, in what turned out to be a shallow valley, some five miles from Hughenden, which was on the Flinders River. It was a tented hospital, with a few wooden huts, of which my bacteriology laboratory was one. Most patients were cases with malaria or dysentery sent down from New Guinea, which I coped with adequately. If there was a need for histology, Edgar King, who became Professor of Pathology at Melbourne after the War, was a surgeon there. On 3 December 1942 there was a cyclone which blew down most of the tents and flooded the shallow valley. My laboratory was blown on its side, but remained supported by the pipe that brought water to the sink. The Petri dishes on which faeces were being examined for dysentery bacilli were scattered all over the floor. Photographs illustrating the scene after the cyclone.
Soon after that the hospital moved to Rocky Creek, on the Atherton Tableland, near Ravenshoe. The Tableland was being developed as a malaria-free rest area near Cairns, and in time two 1,200-bed hospitals were located there. By this time I had identified the nurse with the long hair as Lieutenant E.M. Bobbie Roberts, sister in charge of blood transfusions, and I was greatly attracted to her (see 143/4/6). Because there were no battle casualties, she worked part-time in my laboratory, on malaria diagnosis, after passing an examination in the art by myself and Patrick de Burgh (later to become Professor of Bacteriology in the University of Sydney), who had a mobile bacteriology laboratory in the vicinity.
While at the 2/2 AGH I wrote three papers (references 11, 12, 13 of 143/1).
B. Correspondence with Professor Weston Hurst, of the Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science, Adelaide (see 143/4/2B1).
In November 1942 I was promoted Major, and continued to work at the hospital until 15 March 1943, when I was transferred to Land Headquarters to fill a newly-created post of malariologist, and almost immediately sent by plane to Port Moresby, in New Guinea.

6. Service in New Guinea, Dutch East Indies and Borneo
Summary from Official War Records (see file 143/4/1). Appointed Malariologist 15 March 1943. Arrived Port Moresby 23 April 1943. Port Moresby to Townsville 19 February 1944. Townsville to Port Moresby 30 March 1944. Returned to Atherton Tablelands 25 September 1944. To Melbourne 3 October to 24 November 1944; then to Atherton Tablelands. By ship to Morotai 8-16 April 1945. Moratai to Brisbane 27 August 1945. Pathologist 115 Heidelberg Military Hospital 19 October 1945. Discharged 30 January 1946.
A. Service in New Guinea, 23 April 1943 to 15 March 1944.
The great importance of malaria in military operations in New Guinea was dramatically illustrated by the campaign at Milne Bay in August-September 1942. Following an interview between Ted Ford (see file 143/4/3D) and the Commander-in-Chief, General Blamey, in Port Moresby in December 1942, steps were taken to greatly strengthen anti-malaria measures. Previously the Assistant Director of Hygiene was responsible for all aspects of infectious disease control at the Divisional level; now a new post of Malariologist was established. Ford was appointed Senior Malariologist and I was appointed one of two (later three) other Malariologists. As such I advised the Divisional staff (medical and operational) on all aspects of malaria, and later other insect-transmitted diseases such as scrub typhus and dengue), and supervised the work of Malaria Control Units and Entomological Research Units.
Initially I worked in Port Moresby with Ford, later I moved to Buna, where 7 Division and 9 Division were preparing for the Huon Peninsula campaign. I was involved with the campaign by 9 Division and associated forces in the coastal area, the Lae-Fischhafen-Saidor campaign, which lasted from 3 September 1943 to 28 February 1944.
While not involved in work on malaria I wrote two short papers on physical anthropology (references 9 and 10, 143/1) and collaborated with the pathologist of the hospital at Port Moresby to write a paper on Salmonella blegdam infections (reference 15, 143/1).
1. I wrote a detailed report on the Lae and the Huon Peninsula campaign, which is quoted at length in A.S. Walker’s Australia in the War of 1939-1945. Series V (Medical). The Island Campaigns, pp. 236-240. Malaria in Coastal Operations in Lae and the Huon Peninsula (New Guinea); September 1943-March 1944.
2. As a result of this work that I was awarded the decoration ‘Member of the British Empire’ (MBE) in 1945. In my absence my father accepted the award at Government House, Adelaide. The citation read ‘In the Technical Administration of Malaria Control Units, Major Fenner exhibited a devotion to duty exceeding that normally required of an officer and has contributed data to the scientific knowledge of malaria control’.
3. Correspondence with Professor Weston Hurst.
4. Salmonella blegdam infections, comment in The Advertiser, 21 August1945.

B. Australia, September 1944 to March 1945.
In October 1944 I was transferred back to Australia for about six months, on the Atherton Tablelands and located at 2/2 AGH, to work with Malaria Control Units. The Director of Hygiene and Pathology, Colonel Keogh, had arranged for me to come to Melbourne for six weeks to work at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute (WEHI) with Macfarlane Burnet. To prepare for this, I had arranged collection of sera and ectoparasites from a number of native animals from an area where a new human disease, North Queensland Tick Typhus, had been identified by staff of the 2/2 AGH. At WEHI I tested the sera for antibodies and found eight positives in five of the eight species collected. The results were published in reference 14 (see file 143/1). The importance of this exercise, unsuspected by me at the time, was to allow Burnet to size me up as a potential research worker at the Institute (see 143/6). Later Keogh, Director of Hygiene and Pathology, with whom I exchanged many ‘semi-official’ letters throughout my time under his direction, especially when I was overseas, subsequently explained this to me, hence various references to Burnet in my letters to Bobbie (see file 143/5).
At the same time as I was transferred to Melbourne, Lieutenant Bobbie Roberts was transferred to Heidelberg Hospital to give lectures on blood transfusion. On 2 November 1944 we were married. When we returned north she was posted to the LHQ Medical Research Unit in Cairns (see 143/5) and I was posted back to the Atherton Tablelands, until moving to Morotai in March 1945. I used to drive down to Cairns every weekend to stay with her at a local hotel.
1. Photograph taken by Julian Smith in 1944. He was a surgeon and expert photographer, father of Orme Smith, then the head of Surgery at 2/2 AGH and was the man who had given Bobbie the direct transfusion apparatus, which he had designed and built.

C. Dutch East Indies and Borneo, 8 April 1945 to 27 August 1945.
In April 1945 I joined HQ 1 Aust. Corps in Moratai, in the Halmaheras, and was involved in malaria control in the attacks on Brunei Bay, Tarakan and Labuan. Throughout these campaigns the malaria rate was low, with only 97 cases being admitted to medical units between April 6 and September 7, out of a force of 17,000. I visited all areas of hostility after active operations had ceased in each. During this time I had periods of interesting work, including tests of aerial spraying with DDT and visits to Tarakan, Brunei, Labuan and Sarawak, and periods of boredom and anxiety about the job with Burnet. This is reflected in the letters to Bobbie (file 143/5/7), all of which date from this period.

BOX 2
143/5 War Service and Later Records of my Wife.
I have mentioned earlier the impression made on me by the transfusion sister at the 2/2 AGH, Lieutenant E.M. Bobbie Roberts. This file contains data on her Army career, some aspects of her later life and the daily or twice-daily letters I wrote to her after we had married and while I was overseas.

1. Official War Records, E.M.B. Roberts (Fenner).
Enlisted as a Staff Nurse in 2/2 Australian General Hospital in Perth on 20 December 1939. Embarked for Middle East 20 April 1940, disembarked Port Said 20 May 1940. Worked in Cairo at a British Hospital but most of time with 2/2 AGH in Gaza and then at Kantara, on the Suez Canal, as Sister in Charge of Blood Transfusion. Returned to Australia 17 February – 16 March 1942. Appointed Lieutenant 23 March 1943 and worked in 2/2 AGH at Watten and Rocky Creek in north Queensland, where I met her and she helped with malaria diagnosis. We were married in Melbourne on 2 November 1944. As a married woman she was not permitted to go overseas. However, learning of her expertise in blood transfusion and especially her ability to carry out direct blood transfusions, Fairley arranged for her promotion to Captain and transfer to the LHQ Medical Research Unit in Cairns. Here she carried out all the direct transfusions and worked with Major Josephine Mackerras in the entomology group.

2. Award of Associate Royal Red Cross in 1945.
Citation and newspaper comment.

3. Testimonials from Brigadier Fairley and Matron-in-Chief Sage, April-May 1948. These testimonials were obtained before my trip to New York for ‘postdostoral’ research at the Rockefeller Institute in August 1948. The year-long trip was funded by a Rockefeller Foundation grant of £3,000, which was not much money, even then. We thought that Bobbie would be able to work (legally), hence the testimonials, but she was not. However, she did gain employment which also provided us with free accommodation for about three months.

4. Citation, official photograph, correspondence and details of investiture (14-8-80) for award of the Medal of the Order of Australia (AOM).

5. Obituary notices. Bobbie died of colon cancer on 28-12-95.
A. Notice in ANU Reporter, 31 January 1996.
B. Various notes in The Canberra Times.
C. Notice in the Australian Academy of Science Newsletter.
D. Biographical notes prepared by FF and for early life in Perth, by her cousin, Dr Ethel Healy.

6. Photographs of Bobbie Fenner.
A. On staff of 2/2 AGH, on leave in Jerusalem in 1940.
AA. Bobbie grilling steaks over fire with Dr Edith Summerskill, of the Empire Parliamentary Delegation, at Lake Eacham, 12 July 1944.
B. by Julian Smith, taken in Melbourne in November 1944.
C. with guinea pigs at LHQ Medical Research Unit in Cairns, 1945.
D. carrying out a direct transfusion from a patient with malaria to a volunteer.
E. FF and Bobbie, in Perth, after my return from Morotai, September 1945.
F. At my parents’ home after our return from USA and Europe in early 1950.
G. At the Sixth Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference on Medical Research, outside JCSMR building, November 1994.

7. Letters from Frank to Bobbie Fenner when I was overseas
We had fallen in love with one another when I was pathologist at the 2/2 AGH in Watten and at Rocky Creek, on the Atherton Tableland. In March 1943 I was sent as malariologist to New Guinea. I gather from the series of letters in these files that I used to write to her about once a week while I was there. We met again when Bobbie was sent to Heidelberg Military Hospital 27 August to 8 December 1944, to give classes on blood transfusion and I was sent to Melbourne in October 1944 for six weeks to work at Hall Institute with Burnet. (I now suspect that the coincidence was a deliberate arrangement by Bill Keogh). Immediately I arrived in Melbourne I proposed, in a little room at Heidelberg Hospital, and three days later we were married, in a side chapel of the Catholic Cathedral, with Mavis Freeman and Bobbie’s friend Reuben Warner as witnesses, and celebrated at Alexander’s Hotel in Swanson Street. We were able to live together for three weeks at the house of Kevin Brennan, then an officer in Keogh’s department at LHQ. I returned to Atherton on 24 November 1944; Bobbie went to the LHQ Medical Research Unit (LHQMRU) at Cairns about 2 December. Until I went to Morotai by ship on 8 April 1945 I used to drive from the Tablelands to Cairns every weekend and we would stay at a hotel (Hides Hotel, and others), and just before I had to go abroad again the Commanding Officer of 2/2 AGH, Colonel Talbot, invited us to spend a week at his seaside cottage at Yeppoon, which accounts for the frequent reference to Yeppoon in these letters.
I was unaware of the existence of several neatly tied bundles of letters (organized by the month) until just before Bobbie went into the ACT Hospice, where she died in December 1995. She was in bed with advanced pulmonary secondaries from colon cancer and had them in a drawer next to her bed. When I found her reading one she looked at me with an expression of such deep love that I could not bear to read the letters until October 2001, when I undertook to update these archives. I was surprised by the ardour in many of them, but I decided to include them in these archives, although they are essentially love letters (and pretty torrid at times), because they illustrate aspects of my character and mention facets of my career not available elsewhere. The comments below refer to matters other than anticipated conjugal bliss, but I must say that reading them over 56 years later that all anticipations except that of her bearing two children were fulfilled. Although we had the best advice then available we did not have any children before we went to New York in August 1948. Bobbie had to have a total hysterectomy for carcinoma of the uterus when we were in America in 1949. When we returned to Australia, with advice from medical friends Stan Williams and Bill Keogh, we adopted Marilyn in 1950 and later my niece Vicki (my brother Tom’s daughter) as an 8-year-old in 1951, because she was being persecuted by her stepmother (her mother had died tragically in a house fire). To our great sorrow, Vicki committed suicide in February 1958, for reasons that we could never determine. Here the letters are arranged as Bobbie had them, one month for each file, and in addition I have gone over each file and included comments, where needed, about each letter.
A. Letters, November 1944 and April 1945.
1. Letter from my father to Bobbie, on learning that we had married (in Melbourne, at three day’s notice, on 2 November, 1944).

2. A. Letters 29-11-44 and 6-4-45 to 30-4-45.
B. Comments on these letters
Julian, in several letters this month and later, was Julian Smith, father of Orme Smith who was the Senior Surgeon in 2/2 AGH. He was the person who devised the direct transfusion apparatus that Bobbie used at 2/2 AGH and much more at LHQMRU. He was also an expert photographer who took many photos of Bobbie and me.
29-11-44. Reply to letter from Bobbie (25-11-44), who had remained in Melbourne after I returned to HQ 1 Aust Corps at Atherton. Bobbie had intended to keep her marriage secret, but it inevitably leaked out and she was required by the Army to change her name. Being married also meant that she would not be allowed to go overseas. In the event, she was transferred to the LHQ Medical Research Unit at Cairns (essentially a malaria research unit) , where she carried out direct transfusions between persons infected with malaria and naïve volunteers, and also worked on entomology with Major Josephine Mackerras. At the time of writing this letter I was on atebrin again, and catching ticks and fleas from wildlife on the Atherton Tableland in an effort to isolate the tick typhus rickettsia. I had identified potential carriers during my spell at the Hall Institute in October-November 1944. van der Velde and Kahn were books on sex; both Bobbie and I learnt a lot from them. Harry Furnell was Deputy Director of Medical Services (DDMS).
6-4-45 to 17-4-45, letters from Townsville or on ship bound for Morotai.
Just before I embarked I met Bill Keogh and he told me that Burnet intended to give me a job when I got out of the Army, and there are recurring references to ‘the Melbourne job’ in these and later letters. Much of my reading (Topley and Wilson, etc.) was directed at my post-war job. There is also much mention of a paper Bobbie was writing about direct and standard blood transfusions. As far as I can recall, it was never published. Also about a collection of slides of malaria parasites for the Sydney School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine – I don’t remember what became of them.
6-4-45. Colonel Talbot was Commanding Officer of the 2/2 AGH, who had lent us his house at Yeppoon for our week-long honeymoon, just before I went up to Morotai. Ken Clinton I had known when he was working with Ted Ford in a Mobile Bacteriological Unit in Beirut. Later he was active in malaria control in New Guinea. Now he was working as an entomologist at the LHQ Medical Research Unit.
7-4-45. Vicki was the wife of my brother Tom, who was in the RAN. We were later to adopt her daughter Vicki. First mention of ‘Satan’; there were to be many more.
9 and 11-4-45. Brig Fairley = Director of Medical Services and mastermind of malaria research at the LHQMRU. Ted = Ted Ford, who had taught when I did my DTM and was now Senior Malariologist. Kevin Brennan had lent us his flat in Dandenong in November 1944. ‘enteritidis paper’ or ‘blegdam paper’ crop up repeatedly. Written by Alan Jackson and me on cases in New Guinea, it was finally published in the Medical Journal of Australia in March 1946. Nancy Atkinson of the University of Adelaide had reported earlier on the nature of the bacterium and did the serotype diagnosis for us.
13-4-45. Reading The History of the Communist Party. Dr Alan Finger, my boss when I worked at the Northfield Infectious Diseases Hospital during long vacation 1937-38 (polio epidemic) was a communist and invited me to meetings, but I never went. First mention of use of DDT.
14-4-45. Ian Macdonald was the fourth malariologist.
17-4-45. In Morotai. Wood Jones, then Professor of Anatomy in Melbourne, was my mentor in physical anthropology (see 143/3/2B). Cecil Hackett taught me physiology and was my predecessor as physical anthropologist in Adelaide (see also letter 24-4-45). Later he and his wife Beattie were our best friends in England, we (or I) nearly always stayed with them when visiting London.
18-4-45. Ruthven is Ruthven Blackburn, in charge of the LHQMRU. Maj. M. is Josephine Mackerras, entomologist at MRU. Suggestion that Bobbie should make a collection of interesting slides of malaria parasites; this recurs in later papers. 2/9 AGH, with Alan Jackson, Eric French, and Lloyd Thomson, was also in Morotai.
20-4-45. A diatribe on women’s dress; I still agree with the analysis!
22-4-45. Started reading Mackie and Macartney’s Bacteriology.
23-4-45. Bob McCulloch and Stuart Allman ran Entomological Research Units, for which I was administratively responsible.
24-4-45. John Haydon was Adjutant of 2/2 AGH; later he and his wife were close friends in Canberra.
25-4-45. Reflections on music and planning what we will do when the war ends. These crop up periodically. Miss Sage = Matron-in-Chief.
27 to 29-4-45 (one letter). 29-4, continued on two more letter-cards, were passionate letters, more so than earlier, but less than later months.

B 1. Letters, May 1945, one or two daily.
2. Comments on May 1945 letters.
There is more than one letter a day (37 in all) and they are more passionate love letters than those written in April.
1-5-45. Mostly love letter, but mention of preparations for campaign in Borneo. John Funder was the father of the Baker Institute John Funder, a close friend from my University days. He co-authored the paper that came out of my six weeks at WEHI in November 1944.
2-5-45. v.d.V. = van der Velde’s book Ideal Marriage, which contained much information about different ways of making love. Trinity = Trinity Beach, near Cairns.
3-5-45. A bit anxious about the passionate letters, but clearly Bobbie enjoyed them and I kept on. I am sorry that I did not keep any of her letters.
4-4-45 (2). The Adelaide job = Director of Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science, which Bill Keogh had ordered me and Bob Walsh to apply for, so that members in the armed services were not forgotten.
7-5-45. Walter MacCallum was Deputy DGMS; Joe Steigrad replaced him when MacCallum became Commonwealth Director-General of Health.
8-5-45. Rod = Rod Andrew, senior physician at 2/2 AGH and later Dean of Medicine at Monash University and a very good friend.
10-5-45. Nancy Atkinson letter arrived, so I was able to finish the Fenner and Jackson ‘blegdam’ paper.
10-5-45 (2). In this and earlier letters ‘spraying’ means aerial spraying of DDT; I was deeply involved in the trials.
12-5-45. Bobbie’s transfer. She had applied to be transferred to the Army hospital in Perth so that she could spend some time with her mother, who was not well. Dr Wilson = a Melbourne gynaecologist who might advise Bobbie about getting pregnant.
13-5-45. AMCU, here and elsewhere, = Army Malaria Control Unit; as malariologist they were under my control and direction. There was a good deal of experimentation with DDT, from the ground as well as aerial spraying.
14-5-45. Page 4 contains a discussion of my attitude to Bobbie’s Catholicism, which I still agree with.
17-5-45. Page 4 contains a partial explanation of why I gave up Christianity early in life.
20-5-45. Page 2, comment on the value of our separation, which allowed us to learn more of each other. But we have had enough (and there were still four months to go).
22-5-45. Jim English = the other malariologist, who spent a lot of time at Aitape, where the atebrin-resistant strain of P. falciparum occurred.
23-5-45. Mention of Bobbie giving lectures on malaria to medical officers.
24-5-45. Alan Sharp appreciated the way Bobbie had trained three ‘Other Ranks’ in direct transfusions. On Tarakan he used an instrument given him by Julian Smith to transfer a litre in 8 minutes and said that this saved several lives. I was touched on the shoulder by a snake as I was reading.
29-5-45. Brief account of our first meeting and kissing, and other memories of 2/2AGH at Watten and Rocky Creek, marriage etc.

C
1. Letters, June 1945, one or two daily.
2. Comments on June 1945 letters.
Another group of passionate letters.
2-6-45. Sinton = Brigadier Sinton, a distinguished malariologist from India. Ian Mac = Ian Mackerras, Director of Entomology at LHQ.
4-6-45. Reflections on how Bobbie worked in my lab at Watten, and on racial prejudice.
6-6-45. Some reflections on previous laboratory work and current work as a malariologist: ‘I am not a research worker – I am not allowed to be – I am an administrator’. ‘There was a job once but there’s none now.’
9-6-45. From Labuan Island, with Ken Clinton – ‘I have an interesting and useful job to do here.’ (epidemic of dengue, very little malaria).
20-6-45. News that Bobbie had been awarded Associate Royal Red Cross (ARRC). Going back to Morotai on a hospital ship. Musings about building our house.
22-6-45. Discussion of D.H. Lawrence’s books.
23-6-45 (1). Still on the ship. Reflections on Christianity and sex.
23-6-45 (2). More thoughts about ‘our house’ – interesting in view of the eventual Boyd house. Sailed past an active volcano.
25-6-45. ‘no officer of rank lower than Lieut.-Colonel can frank an officer’s letter, so I may not be as expressive as usual’.
26-6-45. Announcing the cessation of war in Europe, the preliminary broadcast said ‘a most importantest message would be delivered to the world.’ So I took to addressing Bobbie as ‘Darlingest’. Stephen = S.E. Williams, virologist at WEHI 1942-45
27-6-45. Happier in work since going to T (?Tarakan) so time will pass more quickly. Three books from home: Darwin Coral Reefs, Haldane The Marxist Philosophy and the Sciences, Sherwood Organic Chemistry.
30-6-45. Talk of another trip (probably Sarawak).

D
1. Letters, July 1945, one or two daily.
2. Comments on July 1945 letters.
Fewer letters than usual, because of much time travelling around Sarawak and Labuan. Much less of letters in first half of month devoted to passionate memories, more to current interesting work, in the field, and plans for our meeting again in Perth.
2-7-45. Travel on hospital ship with large number of nurses (recalled trip from Brisbane to Hughenden in 1942, when I first spotted Bobbie). Fretting about wasting time in army and wanting to get on to the WEHI job.
3-7-45. I will be moving about and seeing places (where?). Mention again of Dr Wilson (gynaecologist) and anxiety to have children. Ruminations about malaria control with DDT, population growth, famines.
4-7-45. Just north of Perth – probably Labuan Island or Sarawak. Discussion of Darwin’s theories on coral islands.
6-7-45. In tent with Mick Cook. Comprehensive tour of inspection over next fortnight. Reading, The Loom of Language. Talk of Bobbie and I having a holiday before starting at WEHI.
7-7-45. Expectation that by now Bobbie is on her way to Perth.
9-7-45. Seven letters from Bobbie and an informal letter from Burnet has arrived offering me a job – very exciting prospect.
12-7-45. In Sarawak, beach, blazing oil wells. Bobbie’s quotes from Héloise and Abelard.
13-7-45. Reflect that van der Velde (Ideal Marriage) arrived while we were at Yeppoon.
19-7-45. I mention that Joan Ferguson Stewart was my girl friend in Woodside days.
24-7-45. Saw in today’s Tabletops that I had been awarded an MBE. Not very excited about it. Another airspray, it seems that I flew on the plane.
25-7-45. Received letter that Bobbie’s transfer to Perth (110 Hospital) had come through. My letter addressed to my parent’s home, 42 Alexander Avenue, Adelaide, where Bobbie arrived 27-7-45.

E
1. Letters, August 1945, one or two daily.
2. Comments on August 1945 letters.
24 letters. At base in Morotai with little to do and hence letters concerned mostly with passionate memories and anticipations, and with future hopes and plans.
3-8-45. Bobbie expects to leave Cairns by air today. I received a reply from Burnet, he was ‘delighted’ to have me in the Department of Experimental Medicine but there would be some delays because the University of Melbourne had to be consulted. Reading Topley and Wilson.
8-8-45. News of the atomic bomb and my reflections on its implications.
14-8-45. After a week of rumours (and many parties) peace official.
18-8-45. Blegdam paper almost finished.
19-8-45. Talk of copies of Bobbie’s Blood Bank paper being sent to Noel Bonnin and Peter Row, as well as given to Major Greenwell, who ran the blood bank on Morotai.
25-8-45. Army has approved compassionate leave for me to go to Adelaide because of my father’s illness.
26-8-45. Blegdam paper finished and sent for publication. Ian Wood to be Assistant Director of WEHI and in charge of clinical research. Left Morotai by air to Brisbane via Biak on 28-8-45.
29-8-45. Night and day in Brisbane and collected trunk, then to Melbourne by troop train.

BOX 3
F
1. Letters, September 1945, back in Australia, and comments.
2. Comments on 1 to 20 September 1945 letters.
Seventeen letters, many of them very passionate love letters.
1-9-45. From Melbourne. Dinner with Burnets, all appears to be OK for job.
3-9-45. From Adelaide. Father very weak. Telephone call to Bobbie in Perth. All sorts of suggestions about what to do in Perth and when we arrive in Melbourne.
13-9-45. Father much better, reading proofs of his latest book. Flight to Perth arranged for 21 September, on a Liberator; Bobbie arranged for us to stay at the Adelphi Hotel, in the centre of Perth.
16-9-45. Drove to Maitland to visit brother Lyell, who was a schoolteacher there.

143/6. Work at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, 1 February 1946 to 28 August 1948.
In Morotai, as the end of the war approached, I began planning my future. My experience as a malariologist had changed my interests from seeking a position in an anatomy department (as suggested by Sunderland, see file 143/4/4) to infectious diseases, and to me the only place to seek a job in that field was with Macfarlane Burnet. In October 1944, when I had returned to the Atherton Tablelands after service in New Guinea, the Director of Hygiene and Pathology, Colonel E.V. Keogh, arranged for me to come down to Melbourne for six weeks to work with Burnet. Just before I went to Morotai on 8 April 1945, Keogh told me that Burnet would offer me a position in the Department of Experimental Medicine of the University of Melbourne, to work full-time in the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute. As the correspondence in file 143/5/7 illustrates, I was very anxious to receive a letter from Burnet, and it finally came on 9 July 1945. Final confirmation was received on 27 August 1945 and I took up the post immediately after my discharge on 31 January 1946.
1. Correspondence about appointment. Summary of work.
Correspondence between Burnet and Fenner, and between Burnet and Registrar of the University of Melbourne, which resulted in my appointment as Francis Haley Research Fellow of the University of Melbourne, to work full-time on the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute (copied from Burnet Archives of the University of Melbourne). I was appointed as soon as my discharge from the Army came through on 1 February 1946, at a salary of £1,000 per annum. I had thought of seeking to obtain a PhD degree, but was told by the University of Melbourne that the position I held was too senior for me to apply.
My field of study, the experimental epidemiology of infectious ectromelia of mice, turned out to be a gold mine, resulting in 11 papers on experimental work and one long review article published over the period 1947 to 1949 (papers 16-18, 20-23, 25-29 of 143/1). Throughout my period at the Institute my wife Bobbie worked part-time as an unpaid assistant. Our chance observation that most mice that did not die of acute hepatitis suffered from a pustular rash (like that of smallpox) led to a most productive ‘side track’ on the pathogenesis of generalized infections. My baptism in the study of ectromelia (which we later named ‘mousepox’) led to a lifetime’s interest in the poxviruses and ultimately to involvement in the smallpox eradication campaign of the World Health Organization.
My relations with Burnet, who was the most creative and imaginative biologist that I have known, were very cordial. At the time I arrived there in 1946, he and all other staff were working almost exclusively on influenza virus. Burnet kept tight control over the investigations of my colleagues, for in those days of non-existent overseas travel, he thought that he had to compete with large teams in the United States. In contrast, he allowed me complete freedom to do as I wished. At that time he worked at the laboratory bench from 9.30 am until 4 pm, and although we met at the tearoom, he was a reserved man and talked little. However, when I had completed an investigation and written it up I would give the manuscript to Burnet. He would read it that evening, and at 4 pm next day we would meet in his office to discuss its publication, and he would then ask about my current and ongoing work. In contrast to common practice in many laboratories, then and now, Burnet never put his name on a paper involving experimental work unless he had done some of the bench work, and all eleven of the papers on mousepox were published in my own name, or linked with that of my wife. However, in 1947 Burnet asked me to collaborate with him in a review article on genetics and immunology (paper 24 of 143/1). He must have been satisfied with my performance, because he then asked me to collaborate in producing a second edition of The Production of Antibodies (book 1 of 143/1). This is a famous little book, because it contains the first statement of the concept of immunological tolerance, which was the topic cited as the contribution for which Burnet was awarded the 1960 Nobel Prize.

2. Syme Prize for Research, University of Melbourne
A. Newspaper cuttings. The Syme Prize was a prestigious award for scientific work awarded to anyone in Australia but made by the University of Melbourne. My father had received the Prize in 1929, for his physiographic studies in Victoria and South Australia; I received the award in 1949, for my studies of mousepox at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, at a time when I was working in the United States.
B. Letter from father and mother, 26-6-49, about announcement of award of Syme Prize. My absence in New York explains the puzzlement of my parents about the award.
C. Correspondence with Museum Curator, Sovereign Hill, Ballarat, about presentation of two Syme Prize Medals, 23.10.78. When Sovereign Hill was set up as a historical centre in Ballarat (where my father had worked in the 1910s and where I had been born) I decided to send both medals there, for exhibition and as a tribute to Ballarat.
D. Correspondence (in 1996) with Dr W.H.R. Ramsay, Head of Geology department at the University of Ballarat, about the location of the medals, and subsequent letter from the Manager of the Gold Museum.
E. Correspondence with University of Melbourne about a duplicate of my medal, which was presented to me by Professor John Mackenzie, Dean of the Faculty of Science, on 7 March 2002.
F. Photographs of the 2002 presentation, sent to me by Professor Mackenzie.

143/7. Overseas Study at the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, August 1948 to July 1949.
During the last few months of the war Keogh travelled overseas and made arrangements with funding bodies such as the Nuffield Foundation, the Carnegie Foundation and the Rockefeller Foundation to provide fellowships to enable people who had been working under his supervision in the Army to obtain overseas experience, to make up for the lost years 1940-45. Early in 1948 he and Burnet decided that I should go to the Rockefeller Institute in New York, then the leading medical research institute in the world, for my overseas study, and from meeting him earlier, Keogh suggested that I should work with René Dubos. I received a Rockefeller Foundation Fellowship of £3,000 plus a grant of £300 from Burnet to help cover travel costs. Papers 31, 33-35 of 143/1 resulted from work done during that year. I maintained contact with Dubos by letters and visits whenever I was in New York (see travel diaries 143/15/2, 4B, 6, 7A, 7B, 8A, 9B, 10C, 13E)
1. Summary of experience at Rockefeller Institute and photo of René and Jean Dubos.
2. Correspondence with Dubos.
A. I have not preserved all of our correspondence and I sent some of it, and copies of this file to Professor Lederberg for the Rockefeller Institute Archives.
B. Relating to 70th birthday celebrations of Dubos.
3. Correspondence with Lederberg about Dubos and relevant journal and newspaper clippings.
4. Extract from a Harvard thesis suggesting that Burnet was offered the Dunham Lectureship at Harvard on the basis of a recommendation from Dubos.
5. Obituary of Jean Dubos and recollections of René.

143/8 Professor of Microbiology, John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1949 to 1967.
Much of this work is described in the book David Curtis and I published in 2001: Fenner, F. and Curtis, D.R. (2001) The John Curtin School of Medical Research. The First Fifty Years: 1948 to 1998, Brolga Press. See Chapters 2, 3, and 15.
1. Appointment. Early in February 1948, while working at the Rockefeller Institute, I received a letter from Sir Howard Florey asking me if I was interested in an appointment to the foundation Chair of Microbiology in the John Curtin School of Medical Research, subject to confirmation by the Interim Council of the ANU. I replied in the affirmative.
A. Appointment as Professor of Microbiology.
B. Newspaper comment, February 28 1948.
2. Activities in Europe, 29 July 1949 to mid-January 1950.
When our US visas expired late in July 1949 Bobbie and I travelled to England on the Queen Mary and went straight up to Oxford, where I and the other two professors of JCSMR (A. Albert and A.H. Ennor) met with Sir Howard Florey to discuss the future of the School and its building. Subsequently Bobbie and I travelled widely in the United Kingdom and mainland Europe, visiting laboratories and seeing the sights. We returned to arrive in Melbourne in February 1950 (see Travel Diary 1 (143/15/1).
A. Letters to my family from Europe, October to November 1949.
B. Photograph in The Age of our arrival in Melbourne.

3. Work at Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, February 1950 to November 1952.
In the absence of laboratories in Canberra, the ANU had made arrangements for my use of two laboratories in the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute (WEHI). For the first year I continued work on mycobacteria, including a long review article on BCG (paper 36 in 143/1) and initiated work on M. ulcerans, which continued for several years (papers 41, 42, 53, 54, 64, 70 in 143/1). However, when myxomatosis broke out in the Murray-Darling basin in 1951 I took on the study of its virology as my major activity and employed Gwen Woodroofe and Ian Marshall to assist me. From the outset scientists of the Wildlife Survey Section of CSIRO collaborated with us by carrying out essential fieldwork. Before we moved to Canberra I initiated collaborative studies with Max Day, of the CSIRO Division of Entomology, on the mechanism of transmission of myxomatosis; this work continued after I moved to Canberra.
A. Photograph of FF with Eric French and Arthur Hughes on balcony at WEHI.
B. Inaugural Lecture as Professor of Microbiology, in the Institute of Anatomy, Canberra, 17 August 1950. The Lecture was published in the Medical Journal of Australia (see 143/1, No. 32). It contains, as a footnote, the first published reference to what became the official name of the ‘Bairnsdale bacillus’ - Mycobacterium ulcerans.

4. Work in Temporary Laboratories in Canberra, November 1952 to November 1957.
See Fenner, F. and Curtis, D.R. (2001) The John Curtin School of Medical Research. The First Fifty Years: 1948 to 1998, Brolga Press, which also shows photos of the laboratories.
My family and I, Stephen Fazekas and family, research assistants Gwen Woodroofe and Ian Marshall and technician Kathleen Sutton (who later married Marshall) moved up to Canberra in November 1952 and worked in these laboratories until November 1957, when we moved into the permanent building. My research concentrated on myxomatosis. During this period (in 1954) I was elected a Fellow of the Australian Academy of Science.
A. Photographs of temporary laboratories.
B. Photograph of my office.
C. Photograph of all members of Department, 1955.
D. Photograph of FF, 1953 or 1954.
E. Four professors studying plans of permanent building, 1954.
F. Report on Study Leave, 1953 (see Travel Diaries Book 2, 143/15/2).
G. correspondence about Mycobacterium ulcerans and Mycobacterium balnei.
From 1948, working at the Rockefeller Institute, and from 1952 until 1957, working in the John Curtin School, first in Melbourne and then in Canberra, I carried out experiments with these two bacteria, both of which are temperature-sensitive and cause skin lesions in humans and mice. These files contain correspondence and reprints of some rare articles.
1. Correspondence with A. Norden about M. balnei. (The name ‘balnei’ was later replaced by ‘marinum’). I visited him in Lund, Sweden, in 1953.
2. Correspondence about M. ulcerans, with J. Tolhurst (Melbourne), E. Thomson and B.R.V. Forbes (Sydney), P. Hauduroy (Lausanne) and C. Shepard (USPHS, Alabama).
3. Correspondence about M. ulcerans infections in Africa. In 2000 the World Health Organization published a 118-page illustrated report on M. ulcerans infection in Africa (‘Buruli ulcer’) (WHOCDSCPEGBUI 2000.1).
H. Canberra Medallion for house at 8 Monaro Crescent.
We built a house on Block 1 Section 3, Red Hill, in 1953-54. The architect was Robin Boyd, the builder Karl Schreiner. In 1956 the house was awarded the first ‘Canberra Medallion’ for a domestic dwelling. The garden was planned by Lindsay Pryor, then Keeper of Parks and Gardens in Canberra and later Professor of Botany in ANU.
1. Article in The Canberra Times, November 1956.
2. Article in The Australian Home Beautiful, November 1956.
3. Article in Australian House and Garden, November 1956 (the photographs were in colour).
4. Photograph showing members of our family plus Mr E.J. Scollay, of the Canberra chapter of the RAIA, and the builders, Mr and Mrs Karl Schreiner.
5. Comment on house in Geoffrey Serle's biography of Robin Boyd, published 1995.
6. Entry on Fenner House in Martin Miles Website on Houses in Canberra:
www.canberrahouse.com.au
7. Description and plan of garden, planned by Lindsay Pryor.

5. The Department of Microbiology in Permanent Building, November 1957 to September 1967.
See Fenner, F. and Curtis, D.R. (2001) The John Curtin School of Medical Research. The First Fifty Years: 1948 to 1998, Brolga Press, which also shows photos of the permanent building.
I continued work on myxomatosis, but in 1957 commenced, in parallel, studies of the genetics of rabbitpox virus, a variant of vaccinia virus.
During this period I was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of London (1958), the Royal Australasian College of Physicians, the Royal College of Physicians of London (1959), and Secretary (Biological Sciences) of the Australian Academy of Science (1958-61). I was a member of the Australian Society for Microbiology from its inception (1960) and its President in 1964-65. I was also a member of the Medical Research Advisory Committee of NH&MRC (1961-67), the Papua-New Guinea Medical Research Advisory Committee (1962-66), the Interim Council of the Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies (1963-64) and the Australian Advisory Committee of the Nuffield Foundation (1965-68).
I also received a number of awards: Harvey lecturer, Harvey Society of New York (1957), Listerian Oration, South Australian Branch of the British Medical Association (1958), Walter Burfitt medal, Royal Society of New South Wales (1959), Leuwenhoek Lecturer, Royal Society of London (1961), Mueller Medal, Australia and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science (1964), and the Matthew Flinders Lecture and Medal, Australian Academy of Science (1967).
In 1961-62 I was an Overseas Fellow of Churchill College, Cambridge. While there I was offered the position of Professor of Pathology in the University of Cambridge, but declined the offer.
A. Paper by W.K. Joklik, former member of the Department, describing work done in the Department of Microbiology.

B. Photographs, FF and Staff of Department.
1. Scientific staff and students of the Department, 1961.
2. Scientific staff and students of the Department, 1965.
3. FF, at bench in the new building. This photo was used on the back outer cover of Foster and Varghese’s history of the ANU (1996).
4. FF, taken by Royal Society photographer in 1961. I was elected in 1958 but did not visit London again until 1961, when I gave the Leuwenhoek Lecture.

C. Honours and Awards (files entered only if correspondence is available).
1. 1958, photograph of medal for Listerian Oration, S.A. Branch of the British Medical Association.
1A. October 1959: Election as Fellow of the Royal Australasian College of Physicians.
2. February 1960: 1959 Walter Burfitt Prize, Royal Society of New South Wales.
3. Founding Overseas Fellow, Churchill College, Cambridge.
A. Itinerary for travel in USA on way to Cambridge and copy of letter from New York to Professor Butterfield, refusing offer of Chair of Pathology in Cambridge.
B. Letters to Bobbie, after she had gone to Adelaide to stay with my mother and before she and Marilyn joined me in Cambridge.
C. Copy of Churchill Review (Volume 37, 2000) indicating that I was a Founding Fellow, and containing a message from me.
4. January 1964, extract from the Australian Journal of Science 1964, 26, 254, regarding award of the Mueller Medal. The Mueller Medal is one of the two major awards of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science. This award was presumably for my work on myxomatosis.
5. December 1964, Honorary MD degree, Monash University
6. April 1967. Two newspaper clippings about Matthew Flinders Medal and Lecture, 1967. At the time this was the highest award of the Australian Academy of Science; it was awarded in alternate years to a physical and a biological scientist. From 1971 the Burnet Medal was awarded to biological scientists and the Matthew Flinders Medal to physical scientists, in alternate years.
7. May 1967. Election as Fellow of the Royal College of Physicians.

D. Reports on Study Leave.
1. Report on Study Leave, 1957 (see Travel Diaries, files 143/15/4B and 143/15/5).
2. Report on Study Leave 3 November 1961 to October1962, as an Overseas Fellow of Churchill College, Cambridge. I used the opportunity to explore in depth the epidemiology of myxomatosis in Britain and continental Europe, in preparation for the book Myxomatosis (see file 143/9/8).
3. Report on Study Leave, 3 July to 8 August 1963, (see Travel Diaries. file143/15/6A).
4. Report on Study Leave, 29 January to 29 March 1964, (see Travel Diaries,file 143/15/6B). This trip included a month as an ANU Visiting Fellow at Moscow State University. File includes correspondence with my Moscow guide, Galya Lipskaya.
5. Report on Study Leave, 21 April to 13 July 1966, (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/7A). While in USA I suffered from an attack of acute appendicitis, for which I was hospitalized in Glasgow (without operation) and had to miss the Ninth International Congress for Microbiology in Moscow. I had an appendectomy when I arrived home.

BOX 4
E. Overseas Travel, other than Study Leave.
1. Indonesia, 26 July to 17 August 1956.
The then Australian Ambassador to Indonesia, Mr W.R. Crocker, had been a colleague and friend in my early days at ANU. He was the foundation Professor of International Relations in the Research School of Pacific Studies. He conceived the idea of establishing a Medical School in Sumatra with Australian financial and technical assistance. In 1956 he asked me to lead a group of three Australian medical academics to examine the proposal, my colleagues being Sydney Sunderland, Dean of the Faculty of Medicine at the University of Melbourne, and Norrie Robson, Professor of Medicine at the University of Adelaide. We recommended that Australia assist with the establishment of a school at Bukkitingi, inland in Sumatra, but this plan was nullified after the students there supported an anti-Soekarno uprising. Eventually Australia provided aid to establish the medical school in Penang, on the coast of Sumatra, Sunderland taking a leading role in this operation (see Travel Diaries Book 3, 143/15/3).
A. Report on Medical Education in Indonesia, 6 September 1956.
B. Newspaper clippings from The Canberra Times and an Indonesian newspaper (note spelling of Sunderland and Fenner); photograph of team, including Australian Embassy officials.
C. Photographs taken on trip.
D. Correspondence with Dr Neil Crosby, August-September 1956.

2. China and Japan, April-May 1957. Late in 1956 I was invited to join a group of some 20 Australian doctors to visit China for a month in April 1957. Most were leading physicians and surgeons from Melbourne and Sydney; the two I knew best Ted Ford and Syd Sunderland (see Travel Diaries Book 4, 143/15/4). I subsequently went to Japan for two weeks before returning to Canberra.
A. Correspondence with Leonard Cox and Syd Sunderland about China trip.
B. Correspondence about visit to Japan.
C. Photographs of Australian group and Chinese hosts at railway stations.
D. Lecture about trip to China.
E. Photograph of Australian group (in front seats) and Chinese audience being introduced by Leonard Cox for my lecture at the Shanghai No. 2 Medical School on Mycobacterium ulcerans infections. Subsequently the Professor of Microbiology delivered the lecture in Chinese (I intended to give it by talking to slides, but had hurriedly scribbled out the night before so that he could translate it). He raised peals of laughter, to my surprise.

3. India, 2 December 1960 to 17 January 1961. Walter Crocker, who had arranged the trip to Indonesia in 1956, was now Australian Ambassador in India, and he arranged for me to go to India under the Colombo Plan and travel all around the country visiting virology laboratories, giving lectures and attending a virology congress. The details of the visit, and my visit to Ankor Wat on the way home, are fully described in Travel Diaries Book 12 (143/15/12A).
4. Papua-New Guinea. Between 1962 and 1973, when I was a member of the Papua-New Guinea Medical Research Advisory Committee (1962-66) and its successor, the Council of the Institute of Human Biology, Papua-New Guinea, I visited PNG, usually twice a year, with the Chairman (Burnet) and secretary (R.J. Walsh) of the Committee and Council. Unfortunately I kept no records of these visits, and the only material in my files is a series of letters written in 1963 to Dr FD Schofield about research in PNG.

F. Lectures, 1957 to 1967 (files entered only if correspondence is available).
1. May 1963: Lecture, Australian Society for Microbiology Queensland Branch, Correspondence with GW Skyring.
2. February 1964, Lecture on rabbits and myxomatosis in Australia, for Symposium on Genetics of Colonising Species, Asilomar, California.
3. March 1966, Lecture, Australian Veterinary Association, on rabbits and myxomatosis in Australia.
4. August 1967. Two lectures given as Pfizer Lecturer to the Victoria Faculty of the Australian College of General Practitioners. Summaries are attached; the lectures were published in the Medical Journal of Australia (see 143/1, papers 109, 110).
5. December 1967. Lecture on Poxvirus Genetics at Conference on Smallpox organized by the U.S.-Japan Cooperative Medical Science Program, in Honolulu. MS attached, not published.
6. 1967. Article for magazine Hemisphere, published in 1967 but not in 143/1 publication list.
7. Unsigned editorial for the Medical Journal of Australia on occasion of F.M. Burnet’s retirement in 1965.
8. Citation on occasion of Burnet’s award of Honorary Fellowship of the Australian Postgraduate Medical Federation.
9. Article prepared at request of Gus Nossal, for Burnet’s retirement celebration.
10. Article on Burnet for Marburger Universitatsbund Jahrbuch 1965.
11. Article on Burnet for Das Artzliche Laboratorium.
12. Genetics of Animal Viruses: Notes for Lectures Abroad, April-July 1966.

G. Book, The Biology of Animal Viruses.
Although written and published after the first book on myxomatosis (see 143/9/8), it is convenient to describe the writing of this book first. The decision to write it followed the suggestion made to the publishers, Academic Press, by FM Burnet, when approached for a third edition of his Principles of Animal Virology, that Academic Press should approach me instead, since he had switched to immunology. After considerable thought, I told Academic Press that I would write a new book with the same breadth of coverage, but with the title of The Biology of Animal Viruses. It took about two years to complete such a comprehensive book, during which I did much less bench work than previously. In part, this influenced my decision to apply for the position of Director of JCSMR when Hugh Ennor resigned in February 1967.
1. Early correspondence with Academic Press, 1963, 1965 and 1966, and development of plans for structure of book. Agreement with Academic Press.
2. Correspondence with various scientists about scientific problems, arranged alphabetically (incomplete). C.H. Andrewes, D. Axelrod; F. Brown, D.C. Burke; L.V. Crawford; R.L. Doherty; K. Habel, E.O. Haelterman, H.C. Hinze, M. Ho, R.L. Huebner, J. Huppert; J.F. McCrea, I.D. Marshall, B.P. Marmion, J.L. Melnick, J.A.R. Miles; H.G. Pereira, E.R. Pfefferkorn, M. Pons; W.S. Robinson; N.P. Salzman, N.S. Scrimshaw, L. Siminovich,
M.G.P. Stoker;
3. Correspondence with Academic Press, 1967
4. Correspondence with Academic Press, 1968
5. Reviews of first edition of The Biology of Animal Viruses.
6. Requests for the use of diagrams and tables from The Biology of Animal Viruses. 1972 to 1975.

H. Newspaper and other reports not related to honours and awards
1. 1966, visit to Trudeau Institute, Saranac Lake, NY.
2. about 1972, discussion of population problems.
3. Discussions of myxomatosis in The Age, December 5 1957 and The Herald, 12 September 1958.

143/9. Myxomatosis.
Myxomatosis was such an important component of my work while Head of the Department of Microbiology, and later in my retirement, that it is best treated as a separate entry in these archives. An extensive collection of reprints of scientific papers (other than those in which I was the author or a co-author, which are in my Fellow’s reprint collection) has been deposited in the John Calaby Library at the CSIRO Division of Sustainable Ecosystems. A varied collection of material is contained in the files listed here, culminating in the two books on myxomatosis of which I was the first author.
1. Correspondence about myxomatosis.
A. Correspondence with C.H. Andrewes, on myxomatosis and virus classification. Andrewes, the doyen of British virologists in the 1950s and 1960s, was involved with myxomatosis in Britain as chairman of the committee set up after the virus was introduced there in 1953, and he was also active in laboratory investigations of the disease. Letters are filed by year, 1952 to 1969.
B. Correspondence with F.M. Burnet.
Burnet’s diaries and correspondence with Burnet. I worked at WEHI, as a member of the ANU from the time of my return to Australia in February 1950 until November 1952.
1. Burnet’s diaries, held by University of Melbourne Archives, provide
interesting information on myxomatosis and encephalitis. The entries for 31 January and 1 February 1951 provide information on my decision to undertake work on myxomatosis.
2. Entries for February 16 to March 5 1951 on Murray Valley encephalitis and myxoma virus scare. Hansard entries with Casey’s accounts of inoculations.
3. Burnet’s diaries for early 1953, and discussions about extending the Animal House for my work on myxomatosis.
4. Correspondence with F.M. Burnet on myxomatosis. Burnet did no research on myxomatosis but was interested in the evolution of the disease.
C. Correspondence with Paul Chapple on myxoma viruses isolated in the United Kingdom and tested in Canberra. When I wished to study the changes in virulence of field strains of myxoma virus in the UK, Chapple was detailed to collaborate and provide me with samples. Early arrangements were made when I was a Churchill Overseas Fellow, at Cambridge (see 143/8/5D2). The paper resulting from this work (paper 103 of 143/1) was by far the most comprehensive study of strains isolated in the field in Europe ever carried out.
D. Correspondence with M.F.C. Day.
1 A. 1951-1952. Max Day was a scientist in the CSIRO Division of Entomology who was interested in the insect transmission of plant viruses. After meeting him on one of the many trips to Canberra to attend meetings with ANU Administration, we collaborated in experiments on mosquito transmission of myxoma virus from 1951, before I had moved to Canberra. This involved considerable correspondence as well as meetings whenever I was in Canberra. Several papers emerged from this work (papers 43, 44, 49, 56, 67, 68 of 143/1).
B. We carried on such experiments after I came to Canberra; we have remained very close friends and fellow tennis players at the court at his home in Melbourne Avenue.
2. 1955-1957. Day went to Washington in 1955 as Scientific Liaison Officer at the Australian Embassy; we carried out an extensive correspondence, which put me in touch with relevant work in USA.
E. Correspondence with B.V. Fennessy about myxomatosis. Fennessy was one of Ratcliffe’s first appointee’s to the Wildlife Survey Section, the 1996 letter contains a copy of the 1-1-51 telegram informing Fennessy of the outbreak of myxomatosis in Corowa.
1. 1991 (on History of Microbiology in Australia).
2. 1996 (on Fenner and Fantini book). F. Correspondence with Jean Macnamara, 1951-1959. Dame Jean Macnamara was responsible for the introduction of myxomatosis into Australia in 1936 and after the war she pressed very hard for further trials in well-watered areas. Although she was a formidable critic of CSIRO in newspaper articles, she was not aggressive in her dealings with me.

BOX 5
G. Correspondence with Henri Jacotot, and G.P. Berry, K.W. Finlay and H. Hohmann. Jacotot was the principal French virologist working on myxomatosis. As well as through correspondence, I visited him when I was in Churchill College in 1962.
1. Jacotot (1951-1959).
2. G.P. Berry (‘transformation’) (1952-59), K.W. Finlay (for N.E. Borlaug) and H. Hohmann.
H. Correspondence with Ken Myers about myxomatosis. Myers was perhaps the major CSIRO field worker with whom I collaborated in the 1950s. Filed chronologically, 1953 to 2000.
I. Correspondence with F.N. Ratcliffe, 1951-1968. Ratcliffe was head of the Wildlife Survey Section of CSIRO and in charge of field investigations of myxomatosis. We had been colleagues during World War II, when at Land Headquarters he was responsible for supervision of Army Entomological Units, which as malariologist I supervised in the field in New Guinea. We worked closely together on myxomatosis and were co-authors of the book Myxomatosis.
1. About myxomatosis, 1951-1954, 1956.
2. With French experts about resistant rabbits.
3. Ratcliffe letters about Jean Macnamara.
J. Correspondence with D.C. Regnery, 1958-1996. Regnery was a biologist at Stanford University who carried out important field studies of myxomatosis in California, much of it in collaboration with a Research Fellow in the Department of Microbiology, Ian Marshall. He came to the Department as a Visiting Fellow for a year in 1970, and I continued to collaborate with him on studies of new poxviruses in rodents for some years afterwards.
1. Before trip to Australia, 1958 to 1969.
2. After trip to Australia, 1971 to 1995.
3. When preparing book with Fantini, 1996.
K. Correspondence with W.R. Sobey, 1953 to 1972, arranged chronologically. First appointed to CSIRO Genetics in Sydney to work on resistance of rabbits to myxomatosis, he later transferred to CSIRO Wildlife and Ecology in Canberra.
L. Correspondence with L.B. Bull. As Chief of the Division of Animal Health of CSIR, Bull had played a major role in investigations of the host range and potential use of myxomatosis for rabbit control from 1937 to 1943.
M. Correspondence with Sir Charles Martin about myxomatosis. Martin had carried out the first paddock-sized trials in Cambridge, for CSIR, in 1934-36. I visited him when I went to Cambridge in 1961; he was then in his 90s and in bed.
N. Correspondence with persons in South and Central America.
1. Chile. 1961 and 1969, about use of myxomatosis in Tierra del Fuego.
2. South America. Enquiries to many countries in South America, in preparation for Fenner and Fantini book.
3. Mexico.
4. Report by I.D. Marshall on his visit to South and Central America, January to March 1961.
O. Correspondence with Brian Walker about RHDV and ‘snuffles’ in wild rabbits.

2. The Fibroma Vaccine Controversy.
Driven by Dame Jean Macnamara, Geoff Douglas, then Head of the Vermin and Noxious Weed Destruction Board of Victoria, negotiated with CSIRO to bring Richard Shope, the man who discovered fibroma virus and in whose laboratories Macnamara had ‘discovered’ myxomatosis in 1933, to advise on the use of fibroma virus to protect rabbits in commercial rabbitries against myxomatosis. I was overseas at the time he came, early in 1962, but with Max Day objected to his conclusions on scientific grounds. We had shown how difficult it was for mosquitoes to transmit fibroma virus between European rabbits. Ratcliffe was also deeply concerned and wrote letters to Shope and to the Head of CSIRO (see 143/9/1IC) concerning Shope’s visit and his report.
A. Correspondence from Shope, Douglas and NSW rabbit breeders.
B. Shope Report and Ratcliffe’s letter to Shope.
C. CSIRO Liaison Notes about use of fibroma virus as a vaccine, October 1962.
D. Fenner’s 1978 correspondence with NSW Agriculture about use of fibroma vaccine in New South Wales.

3. Early Attempts to Introduce Myxomatosis into Australia.
From 1919 H. de Beaurepaire Aragão attempted to persuade the Australian authorities to introduce myxomatosis into Australia. These letters summarize his efforts. Aragão’s reprints, with many other reprints on myxomatosis, are available at the John Calaby Library, CSIRO, Gunghalin.
A. Correspondence between Aragão and Breinl, 1919.
B. Reaction of stockowners and the Sydney press to proposal.
C. Reaction of Institute of Science and Industry to Aragão proposal.
D. Sir Harry Allen on Aragão proposal.
E. Correspondence with Aragão and trial by NSW Agriculture, 1924-29.
F. Aragao’s interest in Bull’s 1937 experiments and to final spread in 1950-51.
G. Obituary notices, H. de Beaurepaire Aragão.
H. Correspondence with Professor C.B. Schedvin about Aragão proposals, 1984 and 1986.

4. Conferences Involving Myxomatosis in Australia.
Several of these conferences were held in Melbourne because the Headquarters of CSIRO was there and Clunies Ross took a prominent part in them.
A. Extracts from Vermin Control Conferences, 1957, 1960, 1964, 1968.
B. Reports of Conferences on Myxomatosis, July 1954 and September 1956, and ANZAAS symposium on myxomatosis, 1955.

BOX 6
C. The Rabbit Problem in Australia, Melbourne 1958.
D. AMRC Workshop, Rabbits and their Control, September 1983.
E. Australian Rabbit Control Conference, Adelaide 1993.

5. Articles on Myxomatosis in CSIRO and other Publications for the Public.
CSIRO has always produced magazines for the general public; two that contain articles on myxomatosis are Ecos and Rural Research in CSIRO.
A. Articles in Ecos, 1978 and 1987.
B. Articles in Rural Research in CSIRO, 1957, 1959, 1962, 1966, 1994.
C. Article and photo of Ian Marshall and Beverley Renfree in The Story of the Rural Credits Development Fund of the Commonwealth Bank of Australia, 1957.

6. Myxomatosis in Europe (except United Kingdom).
Soon after arriving in Churchill College, in Cambridge, for the only full year’s study leave that I took, I decided to spend most of my time gathering information on myxomatosis. I instigated an extensive correspondence and visited many of the people involved.
A. Correspondence with Pasteur Institute before myxomatosis was introduced by Delille in June 1952.
B. Examples of letters written by me and data collected while at Churchill College in 1962.
C. Data from European and Mediterranean Plant Protection Organization, August and November 1960.
D. Data from Office Internationale des Epizooties.
E. Data from Austria
F. Data from Denmark
G. Data from Finland.
H. Data from France.
I. Data from Germany.
J. Data from Italy.
K. Data from Netherlands.
L. Data from Sweden.
M. Data from Switzerland.
N. Data from Yugoslavia.

7. Newspapers comments on myxomatosis involving FF, 1951 to 1957.

8. Book, Myxomatosis, by F. Fenner and F.N. Ratcliffe, published 1965.
In 1957 I thought that the time was ripe for me to begin writing my first book (I had been essentially a ‘research assistant’ in The Production of Antibodies, with Burnet). Because many of the experimental papers had been published in the Journal of Hygiene, published by Cambridge University Press, I wrote to them about the proposal. The book was completed in 1963 and published in 1965.
A. Initial correspondence with Cambridge University Press (CUP), 1957.
B. Further discussions with CUP involving Ratcliffe as co-author, outline and acceptance by Syndics of CUP.
C. Agreement on publication, signed by Fenner, Ratcliffe and CUP.
D. CUP Promotional material.
E. Disposal of remaining stocks of book. I was very disappointed that CUP did not give me the opportunity to have fifty of the remnant stocks.
F. Reviews of Myxomatosis in scientific journals and popular press. The book got many and very complimentary reviews. Most of these were sent to me by CUP; they are assembled here by country of publication, in alphabetic order. The numbers in brackets indicate the number of reviews in each country.
1. Australian newspapers (3).
2. Australian journals (4).
3. Austrian journal (1).
4. French Journals (4).
5. German Journals (7).
6. Italian journals (2).
7. Romanian journals (2).
8. South African journals (1).
9. United Kingdom newspapers (3).
10. United Kingdom journals (16).
11. United States journals (8).
12. USSR journals (2).
13. Brazilian journal (1).
G. Letters about Myxomatosis. Arranged alphabetically, from J.A. Boycott (compares it with Hackett’s Malaria in Europe), Lionel Bull, F.M. Burnet, Lord Casey (former Minister-in-charge of CSIRO), Geoff Douglas, René Dubos, Alfred Gottschalk, Arthur Grace, Harry Hoogstraal, A.R. Mead-Briggs (with some comments), Bill Reeves, Hugh Ward.

9. Production of book Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests. The History of Myxomatosis – An Experiment in Evolution, by F. Fenner and B. Fantini, published 1999.
Late in 1991 I was invited to give a paper on the history of smallpox at a conference on ‘Emerging Infectious Diseases: Historical Perspectives’, which was held at Merieux Conference Centre at Annecy in April 1992 (Proceedings were published in History and Philosophy of the Life Sciences, 1993). At lunch one day I sat next to the symposium organizer, Professor Bernardino Fantini, Director of the Louis Jeantet Institute for the History of Medicine at the University of Geneva. I accompanied him on his trip back to Geneva by taxi and he suggested that we should collaborate on a series of papers on the history of myxomatosis. The correspondence in these files (143/9/C1-3) illustrate how the idea of a series of papers evolved into the concept of a book on the biological control of vertebrate pests (of which the only two successful agents were myxoma virus and rabbit haemorrhagic disease virus). My frequent trips to WHO in Geneva made it possible to discuss problems face to face, and there were many email communications that were not kept.
A. Correspondence with Fantini, June to December 1992.
B. Correspondence with Fantini, January to October 1993, including discussion of pros and cons of series of journal articles and a book.
C. Correspondence with Fantini, January 1994 and July 1997, illustrating evolving structure of book, arranged by year and chronologically within each year.
1. 1994.
2. 1996.
3. 1997.
4. 1998, final version of Contents of book, with numbers of words, figures and tables.
D. Arrangements for publication.
In early discussions Fantini promised to arrange a publisher, but when nothing had happened by mid-September 1997, when the writing was well advanced, I started to look around. Initial contacts with Oxford University Press, Oxford, were negative, but they suggested CAB International, who agreed to publish the book and sent us a contract which Fantini and I signed in February 1998, when I was on a visit to Geneva. The file includes messages from OUP and a number of communications between myself and Tim Hardwick of CAB International. There were many more email exchanges which are not included. The hard copy, illustrations and disc for the first seven chapters was sent off on 28 October 1998 and the second batch (Chapters 8-14) on 2 November. The book was published in 1999.
1. Negotiations with Oxford University Press.
2. Correspondence with CABI Publishing.
3. Correspondence with CABI Publishing about publicity, reviews, royalties.
E. Glossy prints and negatives of illustrations, by chapters.
Photographs and biographical legends of scientists are indicated by chapter.
1. Chapters 1-2.
2 Chapter 3. L. Pasteur, A. Loir, J. Danysz.

BOX 7
3. Chapter 4. G. Sanarelli, H. de B. Aragão, D.C. Regnery, M.F.C. Day, M.L. Rothschild, A. Mead-Briggs.
4. Chapter 5. I.D. Marshall, P.J. Kerr, G.M. Woodroofe.
5. Chapter 6. A.J. Macamara, R.E. Shope, C.J. Martin, L.B. Bull, H.J.L. Cumpston, F.N. Ratcliffe, W.I. Clunies Ross, B.V. Fennessy, J.H. Calaby, K. Myers, F.J. Fenner.
6. Chapter 7. R. Mykytowicz, G.W. Douglas, A.L. Dyce.
7. Chapter 8. R.H.C. Shepherd, J.W.E. Edwards, S.H. Wheeler, D.R. King, B.D. Cooke, I.P. Parer, C.K. Williams, R.T. Williams, C.H. Tyndale-Biscoe, W.R. Sobey.
8. Chapter 9. P.F.A. Delille, H. Jacotot, L. Joubert.
9. Chapter 10. H.V. Thompson, J. Ross.
10. Chapter 11. L. Capucci, B. Coman, N.P. Newland, A.J. Robinson.
11. Chapter 12. A. Newsome.
F. Letters from scientists about book.
Because of the use of emails (only a few of which were printed) and the close location of many scientists whom I consulted (in ANU and CSIRO Wildlife) the letters account for only a small percentage of communications. These are additional to letters specifically referred to in the book (see file 143/9/8G, below). They are arranged alphabetically in three groups: correspondence with Australian colleagues, correspondence with European colleagues and correspondence with colleagues in USA.
1. Correspondence with Australian colleagues: J.J. Burdon, J.H. Calaby,
D. Conolly, B. Coman, B.D. Cooke, J.W. Edmonds, M. Harper, M. Holland, P.J. Kerr, B.O. Jones, D. King, I.D. Marshall, G. Mutze, K. Myers, N. Newland, A. Newsome, M. O'Dea, I. Parer, A.J. Robinson, R.C.H. Shepherd, W.R. Sobey, L. Twigg, S. Wheeler, C.K. Williams, R.T. Williams.
2. Correspondence with colleagues on Europe: L. Capucci, A. Mead-Briggs, J. Ross, M. Rothschild, H.V. Thompson.
3. Correspondence with colleagues in USA: T. Burke, S. Levin, D. Matson, A. Smith, D.S. Strayer.
G. Letters referred to in Endnotes or Footnotes (N.B., in The Biological Control
of Vertebrate Pests this file is referred to as 143/25/5A).
1. J. Amaya, T. Batty, D. Berman, W.I.B. Beveridge, G. Bouvier, F.M. Burnet, J. Cane, B.D. Cooke, R.J. Downward, A.L. Dyce, J.W. Edmonds.
2. R.-M. Licon, I.D. Marshall, F.N. Ratcliffe, G. Remaudiere, Rodier method, K.H. Strong, B. Wichmann, C.H. Tyndale-Biscoe.
3. Material from CSIRO Archives.
H. Letters on rabbit calicivirus disease referred to in Endnotes or Footnotes
(N.B., in The Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests this file is referred to as 143/25/5B).
L. Baker, L. Capucci, B.J. Coman, B.D. Cooke (report), B.D. Cooke (letters), Human Health Study, A. Newsome, New Zealand (2), A.W. Smith, H.A. Westbury.

BOX 8
I. Data from CSL Ltd.
1. Provision of myxoma virus for inoculations.
2. Provision of fibroma virus for vaccination.
J. Reviews of The Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests.
In contrast to the numerous reviews of Fenner and Ratcliffe’s Myxomatosis, this book received very few reviews.

10. Chapter on Myxomatosis for proposed book by Myers et al.
Ordinarily, chapters of edited books with chapters from individual authors or co-authors take longer between the submission of the manuscript to the editor and publication than do multiple-author books because invariably some authors are late in submitting manuscripts.
In 1977 Ken Myers suggested that I should write a chapter on myxomatosis for a book The Rabbit in Australia, to be edited by Myers, J.H. Calaby and B.V. Fennessy. In 1982, when a competing proposal by H.V. Thompson (see file 143/9/11) came to light, this was dropped. Myers was originally proposed as a co-editor of the Thompson book, but dropped out. I prepared a manuscript and obtained comments on it, then submitted it to Myers in 1977. It was later cannibalized as the basis of the chapter for the Thompson book. (Myers was an author of another chapter in the Thompson book).
A. Correspondence with Myers, 1977-1981.
B. Comments on my chapter on myxomatosis.

11. Chapter on Myxomatosis for book The European Rabbit, edited by H. V. Thompson and Carolyn King, published in 1994.
This began in 1982 with a proposal by Thompson for an Oxford University Press book with 14 chapters by different experts, edited by himself and W.A. Rees. By 1984 the proposal was for a book of 18 chapters, edited by Thompson, Ken Myers (Australia) and J.A. Gibb (New Zealand). There were disagreements between the proposed editors, and in March 1986 a new outline was produced for a book with 12 chapters, to be edited by Thompson and Carolyn King (New Zealand).
The chapter on myxomatosis was prepared by myself and John Ross (England) and submitted in 1986. There followed further delays and revisions of the contents, so that in July 1991 Carolyn King circulated a ‘Newsletter’ with a proposal for a book with 9 chapters, which became 7 chapters by June 1992. As late as August 1991 Ken Myers, who was the senior author of the chapter on ‘The rabbit in Australia’, had doubts about eventual publication of the book and proposed a ‘stop-loss’ suggestion, but this was not needed. Ross and I extensively revised our chapter ‘Myxomatosis’ and submitted it in July 1992. The page proofs were corrected by me on 24 May 1993; the book was published in January 1994.
A. Early correspondence, 1982-1985.
B. Correspondence with H.V. Thompson, May 1985 to September 1992.
C. Correspondence and ‘Newsletters’ from Carolyn King.
D. Correspondence with Ken Myers, 1991

12. ‘Popular’ chapter on myxomatosis for a proposed book Australia - In Our Recollection to be edited by A.G. Austin. The proposal lapsed.

143/10. Director, John Curtin School of Medical Research, September 1967 to May 1973.
See also Chapter 4 of the book: Fenner, F. and Curtis, D.R. (2001) The John Curtin School of Medical Research. The First Fifty Years: 1948 to 1998, Brolga Press.
In February 1967 the Head of School, Hugh Ennor, resigned to become Secretary of the Department of Education and Science of the Commonwealth Government. Partly because I had been distracted from laboratory work by writing The Biology of Animal Viruses, I applied for the job and was appointed in September 1967, for a 7-year term. I resigned in May 1973 to become Director of the newly established Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies.
During my period as Director I received several honours and awards: Britannica Australia Award for Medicine (1967), Life Sciences Lecturer, University of California at Davis (1969), Scholar-in-Residence, State University of New York (1970), the Lilly Lecture of the Royal College of Physicians, London (1970), Ciba Lecturer in Microbial Biochemistry at Rutgers University (1970), Victor Coppleson Lecture of the Australian Post-Graduate Medical Foundation (1971).
1 A. Correspondence with University administration about appointment.
B. Copy of Press Release and article in The Advertiser, an Adelaide newspaper, and The Canberra Times.
2. Photographs while Director of JCSMR.
A. Shortly after appointment.
B. About 1971.
C. In 1973, at Oholo Conference in Israel.
D. Events on day of my resignation, May 1973. Lecture in Florey Theatre and audience; presentation by Professor Courtice (Acting Director) of a book of illustrations of the School at the time.
3. Honours and Awards (if correspondence available).
<A. November 1967, Britannica Australia Award for Medicine, 1967. Canberra
Times report and invitation to Bobbie. Photograph of Medal.
A 1. Life Sciences Lectureship, University of California at Davis, April 1969, (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8B).
2. Comments in The Advertiser (Adelaide) and The Canberra Times.
B. Lilly Lecture, Royal College of Physicians, London, June 1970 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8C).
C. Scholar-in-Residence, State University of New York, September-October, 1970. (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8D).
D. Victor Coppleson Lecture, Australian Postgraduate Federation in Medicine, August 1970.
E. CIBA Lectures in Microbial Biochemistry, Rutgers University, New Brunswick, New Jersey. (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8D).
F. Appointment as Fogarty Scholar at the National Institutes of Health, Bethesda. This was a prestigious appointment, which I took up in three sessions: over the long vacation period in 1971-72 and 1973-74 (see Travel Diaries, files 143/15/9B and 10C) and after retirement, for six months in 1982-83 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/17B). All scholars, included among whom were some Nobel Prize winners) were presented with a Fogarty Medal
1. Description of the Scholars-in-Residence Program and correspondence concerning appointment as Fogarty Scholar.
2 A. Correspondence between October 1972 and October 1976, including second term in December 1973 to February 1974.
B. Photograph taken by NIH photographer during second term, 1974.
3. Photographs and comment in NIH Record, January 4 and February 15, 1972.
4. Scholars and wives at Stone House January 1983, on occasion of presentation of a Fogarty medal to James Heagerty, who had run the program for many years.

4. Reports on Study Leave.
A. Report on Study Leave, December 1967 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/7B).
B. Report on Study Leave, November 1968 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8A).
C. Report on Study Leave, March-April 1969 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8C).
I had been appointed as Life Sciences Lecturer, University of California at Davis. This appointment, which was sponsored by veterinary public health worker Carl Schwabe, involved spending a month at the University and giving a number of lectures.
D. Reports on Study Leave, June 1970 and September-November 1970 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/8D). In October 1970 I was Scholar-in-Residence, State University of New York. This involved a month travelling throughout the universities in the system, starting in Brooklyn and visiting Albany, Syracuse and several other campuses of the State University.
E. Report on Study Leave, June-July 1971 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/9A).
F. Report on Study Leave, December 1971 to March 1972 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/9B).
G. Report on Study Leave, January and April 1973 (see Travel Diaries, file 143/15/9C, D).

5. Transcripts of radio interviews, 1967 to 1972.
A. ABC ’Insight’ broadcast No. 24, celebrating Burnet’s 70th birthday, 19 October 1969.
B. ABC ’Insight’ broadcast No. 335: ‘Professor Frank Fenner – a Scientific Portrait’, 18 July 1971.

6. Lectures, 1968 to 1973, mostly unpublished (files entered only if correspondence is available).
A. Lecture about JCSMR given at Sydney, Melbourne, Monash and Queensland Universities in early 1968, shortly after becoming Director of the School.
B. Article prepared for Australian Students Medical Magazine Panacea, 1968.
C. Lecture to Melbourne branch of the Royal Australasian College of Physicians, October 1968.
D 1. Lecture ‘Immunization against Virus Diseases’ at Royal Australasian College of Physicians meeting in Brisbane May 1969.
2. Lecture on Rubella, Australian Group of the Scientific Study of Mental Deficiency, November 1969. Report in The Age, 24 November 1969.
E. Lecture to First International Congress on Domiciliary Nursing, Melbourne, February 1970: ‘An Overview of Man and his Environment in Australia.’
F. Lecture on James Cook and Scurvy, Cook Bicentennial Celebrations, Royal Society of Queensland, May 1970. After this lecture (which was organized by John Francis of the Veterinary Faculty, University of Queensland), I was flown up to the site of the beaching of the Endeavour, at Port Douglas, with a small party, which included Cook historian Beaglehole. Queen Elizabeth and family performed at a ceremony at Port Douglas.
G. CIBA Lectures in Microbial Biochemistry, 1, 2, 3 September 1970 (see also file 143/10/3E).
H 1. Address to Postgraduate Committee in Medicine of ANU, December 1970. ‘Infectious Disease and Social Change’.
2. Report in The Canberra Times, 7 December, 1970.
I. Lecture (as given, published version = 124 in file 143/1 was longer) for Australian Institute of Political Science Summer School ‘How Many Australians: Immigration and Growth’, January 1971.
Ja, b. I gave lectures at three symposia at the ANZAAS meeting in Brisbane in May 1971. One of these, in the symposium on ‘The Social Responsibilities of Scientists,’ was published and is not provided here. The other two were on ‘Insecticides’ and ‘Viral Systematics’.
K. Lecture at Canberra Hospital Medical Seminars, ‘Population and Resources: Global and Local’, June 1971.
L. Visit to New Delhi and lecture on ‘The Genetics of Animal Viruses’, June 1971.
M. Lecture to Centre for Continuing Education, ANU, on ‘Abortion: Medical Questions’, October 1971.
N 1. Lecture to the Australia Party, ‘Migration and Australia’, 17 October 1971.
2. Report in The Canberra Times, 18 October 1971.

BOX 9
O. ANU Public Lecture, 26 April 1972: ‘Is there an Environmental Crisis?’
P. Article in ANU Reporter, 1972, ‘A Centre for Natural Resources in the Australian National University?’
Q. Foreword for book by Harrison, G.B. and Boyce, A.J. (1972) The Structure of Human Populations.
R. Article for Woroni, the ANU Students newspaper, June 1972.
S. Article for BHP Review, Summer 1972, ‘The World Situation in Resources and Some Implications for Australia’.
T. Lecture at Cessnock, NSW, ‘The Environmental Crisis – Population, Resources, Pollution’, April 1972.

7. Reports on Aspects of Science in Australia.
A. Last Report as Director of John Curtin School of Medical Research.
Report to Council of Australian National University, May 1973. I was Director of the JCSMR from September 1967 to May 1973. This was my final report and summarized my views of the School over the period of my directorship.
B. CSIRO and Medical Research: Report to Advisory Council of CSIRO recommending establishment of a Division of Human Nutrition, October 1973.
I was a member of the Advisory Council of CSIRO from 1970-75 (and again in 1979-81). In 1973 I was asked to act as a one-man committee to report on the future of the Division of Biochemistry and General Nutrition in anticipation of the retirement of Dr AT Dick as Chief in 1976. My advice that it should be restructured as a Division of Human Nutrition, to complement CSIRO's very extensive involvement in food production and processing, was accepted, and it has had a very successful history in that role.
1. FF’s Draft Report, May 1973.
2. FF’s Final Report, October 1973.
3. Correspondence with Dr Everingham, Minister for Health.
4. Correspondence with Dr J.R. Price, Chairman of CSIRO, and CSIRO response to Proposal.
5. Miscellaneous correspondence after 1973.

8. Books on Virology.
When negotiating about my appointment as Director, I indicated that I wished to continue with laboratory research. However, after a few months on the job I realized that I could not do laboratory research through colleagues (whether PhD students, research assistants or staff members) without doing a substantial amount of benchwork myself. I found the demands this made on my time were incompatible with being readily available for consultation by staff or work on committees. Since I started work early, there were three hours or so every morning before other people came in, and I decided to use this time writing books.

A. Medical Virology
I had always felt somewhat guilty being called a Professor and having never given a course of lectures (I was never invited to lecture to students in the Faculties), so I decided to write a textbook on virology for medical students. I persuaded David White, an early PhD graduate (1960) from the Department of Microbiology, who was then Professor of Microbiology at the University of Melbourne, whom I knew to be a first-class teacher of virology, to be co-author. The first edition was published in 1970 and received excellent reviews and sold very well.
1. Memorandum of Agreement with Academic Press (the name Viruses of Man was changed to Medical Virology by the time the book went to print.
2. Reviews in journals.
3. Comments sent in response to complimentary copies.
4. Unsolicited letters of comment and commendation.
5. Spanish edition, published 1973.
6. Requests for use of diagrams or tables by other authors, 1972 to 1975.

B. The Biology of Animal Viruses, 2nd Edition.
The first edition of The Biology of Animal Viruses, published in 1968, had sold very well, but by the early 1970s clearly needed updating. The rapid advances were primarily in molecular virology, in which I lacked expertise, so I enlisted the help of three former students (Brian McAuslan, Joe Sambrook and David White) and one former staff member (Cedric Mims) as co-authors. We agreed on who should take primary responsibility for each chapter, then all authors should read each chapter, and finally I edited them so that there was a uniform style and a minimum of overlap. The Memorandum of Agreement with Academic Press was signed in March 1971 and the second edition published in hardback in 1974. The reviews were good, but many of those interested in the book complained that the price was too high. After several thousand numbers of the hardback had been sold the publishers produced a soft-cover ‘Students Edition’ for about half the price. Total sales exceeded 11,000 copies.
1. Memorandum of Agreement with Academic Press.
2. Discussions with co-authors on allocation of work and general principles (incomplete file).
3. Reviews of The Biology of Animal Viruses, 2nd edition.
4. Comments to Academic Press about the need for a soft-cover Students Edition, and their response.
5. Russian translation, published in 1976.
6. Glossy prints of plates used in The Biology of Animal Viruses, 2nd edition.
7. Requests for the use of diagrams and tables in other publications.

9. Committees on Nomenclature and Taxonomy of Viruses.
I had missed the International Congress of Microbiology in July 1966 because I had to return quickly to Australia with a diseased appendix, but in my absence I was elected as a member of the newly-formed International Committee on the Nomenclature of Viruses (ICNV), in which C.H. Andrewes and André Lwoff were the driving forces. I was unable to attend the next International Congress on Microbiology in Mexico City, but in my absence I was elected President of the Committee until the 1975 Congress in Madrid in 1975. During my term as President the name was changed to the International Committee on the Taxonomy of Viruses (ICTV). I attended meetings of the Executive Committee at least once annually. The files gathered here are the only ones available for this period in Australia. The Committee produced a book summarizing the current position after most International Congresses, the First Report (1971) was 91 pages long; I edited the Second (1976), which was 115 pages long; the Seventh (2000) is a massive book of 1,162 pages.

A. Poxvirus Study Group. I was a member of the Poxvirus Study Group from 1966 until 1990, when I resigned. Business was conducted by correspondence; only a few items are retained in this file, to provide an indication of how the Study Group worked.
1. Correspondence with Keith Dumbell as Chairman, July 1977 to April 1978.
2. Correspondence with Joe Esposito as Chairman, May 1985 to August 1986.
3. Correspondence with Joe Esposito as Chairman, January 1990.
B. Minutes of meetings of the ICNV, Moscow 1966, Mexico City 1970, Budapest 1971.
C. Minutes of Executive Committee of ICNV/ICTV, April 1968, April 1973, September 1975.
D. Reviews of Second Report of ICNV.
E. Correspondence about ICTV matters, 1977 to 1994.

10. Newspaper articles not filed elsewhere.
A. Australian Financial Revew, 19 September 1969.
B. Article on ‘Popullution’.

143/11. Director, Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies, May 1973 to December 1979.
During my time as Director of JCSMR the Vice-Chancellor, Sir John Crawford, had appointed me Chairman of two committees, one to produce a case for the establishment of an undergraduate medical school in ANU, which failed, and the other to produce a case for the Australian Universities Commission to justify what was then called the Centre for Natural Resources. This suggestion was strongly supported by the AUC in its 1972 Report. Later its name was changed to the Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies (CRES).
Initially I was a member of the selection committee for the Director of CRES, but on 11 September 1972 I resigned from that committee and applied for the position. I was appointed on 14 May 1973, to hold the position until I reached the statutory retirement date of 31 December 1979.

1. Appointment.
A. Correspondence relating to the appointment.
B. Press Release and ANU Reporter announcements of the appointment.
C. Article by FF in The Australian National University News, July 1973, describing the history and aims of CRES.
D. Photograph taken at time of appointment as Director of CRES.

2. Honours and Awards.
A. In 1976 I was appointed Companion of the Order of St Michael and St George (CMG) for services to Medical Research.
B. In 1977 I was elected a Foreign Associate of the US National Academy of Sciences.

3. Reports on Study Leave.
Between 1974 and 1979 I undertook many short trips related to meetings of either the Executive Committee of the Scientific Committee on Problems of the Environment (SCOPE, see 143/12) or in connection with the WHO Smallpox Eradication Program (see 143/16).
A. July and October 1973 (see also Travel Diaries Book 10).

B. November 1973 to May 1974 (see also Travel Diaries Book 10).
15-19 October 1974 (see also Travel Diaries Book 11).
15-29 December 1974 (see also Travel Diaries Book 11).

C. 7 to 25 March 1975 (see also Travel Diaries Book 11).
7 August to 11 October 1975 (see also Travel Diaries Book 11).
27 November to 7 December 1975 (see also Travel Diaries Books 11 and 13).

D. 6 to 19 February 1976, (see also Travel Diaries Book 13).
15 to 22 May 1976 (see also Travel Diaries Book 13).
2 to 23 October 1976 (see also Travel Diaries Book 13).

E. 1 April to 6 May 1977 (see also Travel Diaries Book 13).
26 September 1977 to 3 November 1977 (see also Travel Diaries Book 13).

F. 19 January to 9 April 1978 (see also Travel Diaries Book 14).
3 to 20 May 1978 (see also Travel Diaries Book 14).
10 to 22 October 1978 (see also Travel Diaries Book 14).
6 November to 14 December 1978 (see also Travel Diaries Book 14).

G. 24 February to 3 March 1979 (see also Travel Diaries Book 15).
7 June to 1 August 1979 (see also Travel Diaries Book 15).
18 November to 14 December 1979 (see also Travel Diaries Book 15).

4. Unpublished Lectures and Popular Articles, March 1973 to December 1979.
A. 1973.
1. ‘Environmental Problems: Approaches to Understanding and Solution at
Local, National and International Levels.’ National Parks Association of the ACT, 22 March 1973.
2. ‘Population, Pollution, Poverty and Prosperity’, ANZAAS, Adelaide, 23 June 1973.
3. Comment on Treasury Economic Paper No. 2 (1973). Lecture to the Economic Society of Australia (ACT Branch), 19 June 1973.
4. Article prepared for Hemisphere, ‘The Botany Bay Project’.
5. ‘The Importance of Port Phillip Bay’. Lecture to a symposium on the Environmental Study of Port Phillip Bay, September 8, 1973.

B. 1974.
1. ‘A Lateral Arabesque: from Virology to Environmental Studies’. Address at ‘A Tribute to Sir Macfarlane Burnet on the Occasion of his 75th Birthday.’
2. School Seminar, Research School of Social Sciences. ‘Strategies for Energy Conversion: Resources and Constraints.’ October 1974.

BOX 10
C. 1975.
1. Zoology Section, ANZAAS, January 1975. ‘Environmental Impact Assessment: History, Rationale and Methodologies.’
2. Address to MADE, June 1975. ‘Environmental Implications of Economic Development in the ESCAP Region.’
B. Article written for proposed publication ‘Research in ANU’, December 1975 (never published). ‘Multidisciplinary Integrative Research at the Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies.’

D. 1976.
1. ‘The Last Five Years and the Future: Environmental Studies’, Octagon Lecture, University of Western Australia.
2. ‘The Eradication of Smallpox’ Lecture in John Curtin School of Medical Research and to Australian Society for Microbiology, Perth.
3. ‘Target Zero: Global Smallpox Eradication’, Public Lecture, ANU.
4. ‘Siglitis: the Activities of ICSU and SCOPE’, CRES Workshop.

E. 1977
1. ‘The Role of Science in Environmental Policy’, Lecture to Australian Water and Waste Water Society, Canberra.
2. Closing Lecture. International Symposium on Microbial Ecology, Dunedin, NZ, August 1977.
3. ‘Is there an Animal Reservoir of Smallpox?’ Consultation on World-wide Certification of Smallpox Eradication, Geneva, August 1977.
4. ‘The Global Eradication of Smallpox’, Lecture given at several places in USA during October 1977.
5. ‘The Australian Environment’, Lecture to National Environmental Education Conference, Lorne, Victoria.

F. 1978
1. ‘Aggression and the Environment’, Lecture to 2nd Austral-Asian Pacific Forensic Sciences Conference, Sydney, July 1978.
2. ‘Viruses as Selective Ecological Forces’, Lecture to 4th International Virology Congress, The Hague, September 1978 (given by ID Marshall).
3. ‘Evolution of the Virus-Vector Relationship’, Lecture to 4th International Virology Congress, The Hague, September 1978 (given by ID Marshall).
4. ‘White Variants derived from Poxviruses’. Address to Consultation on
Monkeypox, Geneva, November 1978.
5. ‘SCOPE and CRES’, Lecture given in Warsaw and Cracow, Poland.
6. ‘The Smallpox Eradication Programme as Seen by a Virologist’, Lecture given in Warsaw and Cracow, Poland.
7. Introductory address to Symposium: ‘Fire and the Australian Biota’ on ‘The SCOPE Project; Ecological Effects of Fire’.

G. 1979
1. ‘Lessons from Smallpox Eradication for the Expanded Immunization Programme.’ For symposium ‘Current Australian Scientific Research; its Application and Relevance to the Third World’, organized by Development Studies Centre, ANU.
2. ‘Some Ecological Effects of Viral Infections’, Lecture for Australian Society for Microbiology (ASM), Adelaide
3. ‘Control of Infectious Diseases ‘, Lecture for Australian Society for Microbiology (ASM), Adelaide
4. ‘Successful Antiviral Vaccines: Smallpox, Poliomyelitis and Measles’, Lecture for Australian Society for Microbiology (ASM), Adelaide.
5. ‘Mousepox (Infectious Ectromelia)’, Lecture for American Veterinary Medical Association, Seattle, Washington, USA.
6. ‘Broader Aspects of Smallpox Eradication’, Lecture to Director-General's Conference, WHO, Geneva.

5. Report on CRES for Committee of Review, August 1978.
Report on the History, Development, Accomplishments and Prospects of the Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies, ANU, August 1978. I was Director of CRES from May 1973 to December 1979. This report was produced to supply information for the first major review of CRES, carried out in 1978 in anticipation of my retirement.

6. History of CRES, 1973-1979.
A. Final Report by Director to Council, November 1979.
B. History of CRES from 1967 to 1979.

7. Medical Virology, 2nd Edition.
Data on the first edition of Medical Virology are given in file 143/10/8A. By 1973 it was clear that a second edition was needed. This was published in 1976. There was correspondence with me and Academic Press about translations into Russian, German, Spanish and Japanese; Spanish, Japanese and Chinese translations were made, the last without consultation with Academic Press.
A. Correspondence with Academic Press.
B. Promotional Material.
C. Reviews.
D. Translations
1. Correspondence about Japanese translation.
2. Correspondence about Spanish translation.
E. Requests to use diagrams, plates or tables from the 2nd edition of Medical Virology.
1. 1977 to 1979.
2. 1980 to 1986.

8. The Australian Academy of Science; The First Twenty-five Years, edited by F. Fenner and A.L.G. Rees.
With the support of the Academy Council, in 1978 Dr Lloyd Rees and I decided to produce a book describing the activities of the Australian Academy of Science during the first 25 years of its existence, from 1954 to 1979. This was published in 1980.

143/12. Papers on SCOPE: Editor-in-Chief, 1976-1980.
In 1971, before I had become involved with CRES, I was elected to the Scientific Committee on Problems of the Environment (SCOPE), a Committee of the International Council of Scientific Unions (ICSU). Initially this involved correspondence and attendance at meetings of the General Assembly, which met every three years, but in 1976 Dr Gilbert White, of the University of Colorado, was elected President of SCOPE and he asked me to take on the newly created role of Editor-in-Chief of SCOPE Publications. As such, I attended all meetings of the SCOPE Executive Committee (see Travel Diaries Books 13, 14, 15), and became deeply involved in negotiations that established John Wiley and Sons, of Chichester as the publishers of all SCOPE publications.
In 1980, when I resigned so that I could concentrate on the book Smallpox and its Eradication, the files of correspondence about specific SCOPE reports that had been completed were discarded and about those in process of publication were passed in their entirety to Dr R.E. Munn, who succeeded me as Editor-in-Chief.
The job required a good deal of correspondence with authors of individual Reports, which has been discarded, correspondence with the President, Secretary and Treasurer of SCOPE and correspondence and several visits to Wiley and Sons. I have attempted to sort this out into eight files.

1. Correspondence with officers of the Executive Committee, arranged chronologically.
A. Correspondence with Gilbert White, President of SCOPE, 1976-1982.
B. Correspondence with Ronald Keay, Treasurer of SCOPE, 1976-1978.
C. Correspondence with Vassily Smirnyagin, Executive Secretary of SCOPE, 1976-1978.

2. SCOPE Agreement with John Wiley & Sons to be publishers for SCOPE.
A. Correspondence relating to selection of Wiley in 1976.
B. Correspondence relating to extension of contract with Wiley in 1980.
C. Wiley brochure on SCOPE publications, 1980.

BOX 11
3. Guidelines for SCOPE publications.
A. Draft guidelines for authors/editors and reviewers of SCOPE publications, prepared by FF in 1977.
B. Draft style-sheet for SCOPE publications, prepared by Wiley.
C. Instructions for SCOPE Editors/Authors, based on draft guidelines and style-sheet.

4. Correspondence with Howard Jones of Wiley, 1977 to 1980.
A. 1977.
B. 1978
C. 1979.
D. 1980.

5. Correspondence on Promotion of SCOPE publications.

6. Correspondence on Translations of SCOPE publications.
A. General Principles.
B. Correspondence about translation into Russian.
C. Correspondence about translation into Spanish.

7. Handover of Responsibility as Editor-in-Chief to Dr R.E. Munn, 31 December 1980.

8. Photographs.
A. Meeting at Victoria Harbor, Ontario, to work on SCOPE 5 Report, February 1974.
B. Meeting of SCOPE Executive in Paris, 1976.

143/13. Brief History of the Botany Bay Project (see also 143/11/4A4).
In April 1972, on the initiative of Professor NG Butlin, FASSA, the Consultative Committee of the Three Academies (Science, Social Sciences, Humanities) set up a Project Committee, of which I was elected Chairman, to undertake a multidisciplinary environmental study of Botany Bay and its environs. The NSW government was enthusiastic about the Project. In January 1973 the newly elected Whitlam government promised $1 million over five years to support it. Butlin was appointed Director from 1 January 1974. Although he resigned at the end of that year, his efforts and those of other staff resulted in several books and working papers, most of which were published after 1976. I was asked to write this brief history of the project by the Council of the Australian Academy of Science.
1. Text
2. Appendices.

143/14. Retirement, from January 1980.
When I retired at the statutory date of 31 December 1979 (the end of the year I became 65 years of age), I was offered a University Fellowship for three years, and subsequently a School Visiting Fellowship, renewable annually. I was provided with excellent office space and facilities. My principal activity over this prolonged period (22 years) has been writing books, and on request, chapters for books.
1. Correspondence relating to appointments.
A. JCSMR Faculty Board Minutes concerning appointments as University Fellow and Visiting Fellow.
B. Appointment to the National Consultative Group on a Verification Profile to the Biological Weapons Convention, Department of Foreign Affairs, 1999 to 2002; 2002 to 2003.

2. Honours and Awards.
A. 1980.
1. ANZAAS Medal.
This was the major award of the Australian and New Zealand Association for the Advancement of Science. Citation and reports in The Canberra Times and Search.
2. ANZAC Peace Prize.
The Returned Servicemen's League awards one Anzac Peace Prize each year. The symbol is a large medallion depicting Simpson and his donkey. The award was in recognition of my involvement in the successful smallpox eradication campaign of WHO. Reports in The Canberra Times and Mufti.

3. Sir Macfarlane Burnet Address, Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases.

4. Silver Jubilee Lecture, Malaysian Scientific Association.

AA. 1982.
1. Fogarty Scholar-in-Residence, 16 September 1982 to 10 February 1983.
A. Correspondence (see also Travel Book 143/15/17B).
B. Certificate and photograph of presentation of Medal.

B. 1983.
1. Florey Lecture, Royal Society of London.
A. Arrangements for establishment.
B. Invitation and arrangements for my Florey Lecture, entitled ‘Biological control, as exemplified by smallpox eradication and myxomatosis’ (see 143/1, publication no. 178).

C. 1985.
1. Burnet Lecture and Medal, Australian Academy of Science. In April 1985, a few months before he died, I gave the Burnet Lecture (I am the only person in the Academy to have given both the Flinders and the Burnet Lectures). It was gratifying that Burnet and his wife were able to come to that meeting of Academy.
Citation, from the Academy Yearbook, 1985-86.

D. 1986.
1. Stuart Mudd Award, International Union of Microbiological Societies.

E. 1987.
1. The Order of the Index.
2. John Murtagh Macrossan Lecture, University of Queensland (see file 143/14/3G1).
3. A.W.T. Edwards Memorial Oration, Australian Society for Medical Research (see files 143/14/3G3 and 143/24/1B)

F. 1988.
1. Japan Prize (Preventative Medicine)
A 1. Fields of Research for 1988 Prizes
2. Nomination of D.A. Henderson, I. Arita and F. Fenner by G.L. Ada (there were parallel nominations of the same three persons in Baltimore and Tokyo)
B. Announcement, Press release by Embassy of Japan in Canberra and my comment.
C. Press Kit provided on arrival in Japan.
D. Comments in press, Nature, etc.
E 1. Arrangements for travel and press interviews.
2. Program and Japan Prize Awards Ceremony.
3. Japan Prize lecture and Lecture for Academic Debate.
F. Japan Prize 1988 book.
G. Photograph of presentation of the ‘Big Red Book’ to the Crown Prince by Henderson, Arita and Fenner.
2. Nobel Prize in Physiology or Medicine. DA Henderson, I Arita and F Fenner for the Nobel Prize in Physiology or Medicine on four occasions. All were unsuccessful.
A. Nomination in 1984 by F.M. Burnet (supported by separate nominations from Baltimore and Tokyo).
B. Nomination of Arita and Henderson by Fenner in 1985. Both, plus Fenner, were nominated from USA, using material (attached) sent by Fenner to Henderson.
C. Nomination by of Arita and Henderson by Fenner in 1986 and 1987. Both, plus Fenner, were also nominated from USA.

BOX 12
3. Nomination of the World Health Organization for the Nobel Peace Prize in 1987. This was unsuccessful.
4. WHO ‘Health for All’ Medal.
5. Advance Australia Award. Citation, report in The Canberra Times and official photographs.

G. 1989.
1 A. Companion of the Order of Australia. Citation and official photograph.
B. Reports in Medscience, Australian Microbiologist, Australian Academy of Science Newsletter and The Canberra Times.
2. Wallace P. Rowe Lecture at annual meeting of the American Association of Laboratory Animal Science, Little Rock, Arkansas, 31 October 1989.

H. 1990.
1. Gordon Meiklejohn Lecture. Correspondence and newspaper clipping.

I. 1992.
1. Docteur honoris causa of the University of Liege. On the occasion of the 175th anniversary of the University of Liege in 1992, the Veterinary Faculty of the University arranged that I should receive an honorary doctorate. The celebrations were elaborate. There was also a symposium in the Veterinary School, in which I participated and gave a lecture.
A. Papers concerning the anniversary and the honorary doctorates
B. Symposium de Virologie-Immunologie.
2. Faculty of Veterinary Medicine, November 1992. Correspondence and program. Symposium at Veterinary Faculty five days after the Award ceremony.
3. Photograph of FF with Professor P.-P. Pastoret.

J. 1993.
1. Macfarlane Burnet Oration, Macfarlane Burnet Centre for Medical Research, Melbourne.
2. Election as Honorary Member of the Australian Veterinary Association.

K. 1995.
1. Copley Medal, Royal Society of London.
A. Letter and notice from Royal Society
B. Letter from Prime Minister Keating.
C. Notices in The Canberra Times 4 July, 2 August, 23 August 1995; Australian Academy of Science Newsletter No. 29, July-September 1995; The Age 4 July 1995; The Advertiser (SA) 3 July 1995, The Australian 4 July 1995; ANU Reporter, 19 July and 13 December 1995.
D. Originals of photos taken at Royal Society (I look grim because Bobbie was dying and I made the trip to London with great reluctance) and for ANU Reporter.
E. Photograph of the Copley Medal.
F. Photograph of me holding the Medal, in my room at JCSMR. Reproduced in the ANU Reporter.
2. Honorary degree of Doctor of Science from Oxford Brookes University. Notification and photograph.

L. 1996 and 1997.
1. 1996. Honorary degree of Doctor of Science, Australian National University.
A. Commemoration Program
B. Newspaper comments on my award,
2. 1997. Edwin H. Lennette Lecture, American Society for Virology.

M. 1999.
1. Selection as one of the Commonwealth Senior Australian Achievers of 1999, the International Year of Older Persons.
2. Derrick-Mackerras Lecture, Queensland Institute of Medical Research
3. Honorary member of the Australasian College of Tropical Medicine.

N. 2000.
1. Albert Einstein World Award for Science 2000.
I made arrangements to go to Johannesburg to receive the Award, but was advised by medical colleagues not to take such a long air trip, because of medical problems after long flights in 1998 and 1999. I therefore arranged for the Australian Ambassador to South Africa, Mr David Connelly, to accept the award on my behalf. To replace the lecture that I was scheduled to give the following day, I prepared a Video (see 143/23/2D) and arranged for an old colleague of mine, Professor Keith Dumbell, to go to the lecture and answer questions. As it was the middle of examination time at the University of Witwatersrand, no-one else turned up at the Video-lecture. I was greatly relieved about my decision not to go.
A. Notification of the Award.
B. Booklets explaining the nature of the Award and previous recipients.
C. Arrangements for the Australian Ambassador to South Africa to accept the Award on my behalf.
D. Written version of material used for video recording for the lecture.
E. Messages of congratulation.
F. The reality of the video-lecture.
2. Patron of the Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases. The previous Patron was Sir Macfarlane Burnet, who died in 1985.

O. 2001.
1. Patron of Sustainable Population Australia.
2. Patron of the Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases.

P. 2002.
1. Clunies Ross National Science and Technology Award for Lifetime Contribution.
A. Program and Citations.
B. Photographs.
C. Response by FF to presentation by Hugh Morgan.
D. Media reports, including photographs in The Canberra Times.
2. Prime Minister’s Prize for Science. Life Scientist of the Year.
This is Australia’s principal award for science and carries a gold medal and a tax-free award of $300,000. The presentation is made at a banquet in the Great Hall of Parliament House, with about 400 guests and the PM and several Ministers in attendance.
A. Conditions. I provided four books, Myxomatosis (1965), The Biology of Animal Viruses (1968), Smallpox and its Eradication (1988) and Biological Control if Vertebrate Pests. The History of Myxomatosis (1999).
B. P.M.’s announcement and brief CV of FF.
C. Photographs.
1. With PM Howard.
2. With Ministers Richard Alston, Peter McGaurin, Kay Patterson and Brendan Nelson.
D. Video shown on large screens just before presentation.
E. Response by FF to presentation by Mr Howard; I sat on his left at the dinner.
F. Articles on 21 August 2002 in The Canberra Times, The Age. The Australasian, The Sydney Morning Herald, Australasian Science, September 2002, Australian Academy of Science Newsletter, August-November 2002.
G. Note from Science Minister Peter McGauran and extract from Hansard, 21 August 2002.
3. ACT Australian of the Year. JCSMR Director, Judith Whitworth, suggested that she propose me for the position of ’Australian of the Year 2003’. I commented that I felt I was too old to take on the public appearances etc. associated with that award, but that I thought that a more appropriate proposal would be for the position of ‘Senior Australian of the Year’. This she did, and early in November I received a letter from the Chairman of the National Australia Day Council telling me that I had been selected as one of the ACT finalists in the Australian of the Year Awards 2003, and inviting me to an Awards ceremony at the National Museum of Australia on 13 November. It transpired that four persons were listed as finalists for the ACT ’Australian of the Year, and that I was at the top of that list. I went to the function and accepted the Award, but after consultation with Professor Whitworth I wrote to the Chairman of the National Australia Day Council, saying that I thought it would be more appropriate, and within my capacity, to be considered by the National Commitee for the Senior Australian of the years Award. I attended the Australians of the Year functions in Melbourne on 25 January 2003, and was relieved to learn that the Committee had acted on my letter; since I had been proposed by the ACT Council in the ‘Australian of the Year’ category I could not be considered in any other category, and a very suitable choice of a woman in the prime of life and an old friend of mine, Professor Fiona Stanley, had been made.
A. Letter from Chairman of the National Australia Day Committee.
B. List of awardees and brief CVs of the ACT Local Hero, Junior, Senior and Australian of the Year. The names of all(?), or of the first on each list go forward to the National Council, announcements being made on 25 January 2003.
C. Reports in The Canberra Times, 14 November 2002, City News, 21 November 2002, ANU Reporter, December 2002.
D. My letter to the Chairman of the National Australia Day Council, after the presentation in Canberra.
E. Program for presentation event on 25 January 2003. The awardees in each section are indicated by red stars.

3. Lectures and Popular Articles
A. 1980
1. A ‘Is Smallpox Really Eradicated’, published in World Health as ‘How can we be sure’.
B. May 1980 World Health: smallpox is dead! (see pp. 35-39).
2. Speech given to the World Health Assembly, 8 May 1980, as Chairman of the Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication.
3. A. ‘Mousepox: Past, Present and Future’, Lecture given at NIH, Bethesda, January 1980.
B. ‘Mousepox: Past, Present and Future’, Lecture given at Universities of Cincinnati and Indiana, October 1980.
4. ‘Introduction’ to CRES Workshop on Environmental Problems in the Alligator River Region.
5. ‘The Establishment of Microorganisms in a New Continent’, Lecture prepared for trip to Malaysia (but not given).
6. ‘Recombinant DNA Technology: Achievements, Promises and Risks’, Lecture given in Kuala Lumpur (September 1980) and at CRES (November 1980).
7. ‘Aging and Infectious Diseases’, for NH&MRC Workshop on Biomedical Research into Aging, Brisbane, April 1980.
8. ‘Mousepox Overview’, Lecture to Symposium of American Association for Laboratory Animal Science, Indianapolis. (Longer paper published in Laboratory Animal Disease).
9. A. ‘The Eradication of Smallpox’. Introductory lecture to conference ‘The Eradication of Infectious Diseases’, at Fogarty International Center, NIH, May 1980.
B. Program of Conference.
10. ‘Human Monkeypox: A New Zoonosis’, Lecture given at JCSMR; QIMR, Brisbane, and Kuala Lumpur Medical School.
11. ‘The Eradication of Smallpox’. Sir Macfarlane Burnet Address of the Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases, Healesville, Vic.

B. 1981
1. School Lecture, John Curtin School of Medical Research, ‘Can Smallpox Return.’
2. Comment on article in World Health Forum by P. Yekutiel, ‘Lessons from the big eradication campaigns.’
3. Lecture at conference ‘The Consequences of Migration in Asia and the Pacific.’ East-West Center, Hawaii, August 25-31, 1981.
A. Planning papers.
B. Agenda and participants.
C. Final version of my paper to Conference, prepared for publication.
D. Letters concerning publication of the Proceedings of the Conference. It was never published.
4. Reminiscences, ANU Reporter, 1 May 1981.

BOX 13
C. 1982
1. Address at conference ‘Viral Diseases in South-East Asia and the Western Pacific’, organized in my honour by John Mackenzie in Canberra (see 143/22/2).
2. Talk given to Annual Meeting of the American Society of Tropical Medicine, Cleveland, November 1982.
D. 1983
1. Talk in ‘Frontier of Science’ series at the University of Florida, Gainesville, 19 January 1983 and associated newspaper clippings.
2. Talk at WHO meeting on ‘New Approaches to Vaccine Development’ and Discussion comment, 17-20 October 1983.
E. 1984
1. Lecture at Scripps Research Institute, La Jolla, October 1984, ‘Monkeypox and Whitepox Viruses: Mysteries of the Tropical Rain Forests of Zaire.’
F. 1986
1. Papers relating to the celebration of the 80th birthday of A.B. Sabin, at NIH, Bethesda, 26 August 1986.
2. Address by FF. ‘Albert Sabin: an Appreciation from Down Under.’ (not published)
G. 1987
1. John Murtagh Macrossan Lecture, University of Queensland, 8 December 1987.
A. Spoken version of lecture.
B. Published version of John Murtagh Macrossan Lecture, as a pamphlet.
2. A. ‘Lessons from Smallpox Eradication’ lecture at Fogarty International Center Scholars Symposium for 100th anniversary of NIH, 13 May 1987.
B. Colour photograph of participants.
3. ‘The Life and Times of Sir Macfarlane Burnet,’ lecture to Australian Society for Medical Research, 16 December 1987 (not published. Audio record: file 143/24/1B.
4. ‘Can Smallpox Return?’ Article in World Health, August-September 1987.

H. 1988
1. Australian Bicentennial Conference, held at the Royal Society 7-8 June 1988, entitled ‘The Australian Contribution to Britain.’
A. Invitation and correspondence.
B. Program of conference.
C. FF’s paper ‘Medicine and Medical Science,’ as given.
2. Paper entitled ‘The Impact of Burnet’ given at meeting of the Australian Society for Microbiology, May 1988, in a session on ‘The History of Microbiology in Australia.’
3. Japan Prize lecture (see also 143/14/2F1)

I. 1989
1. Dinner address at meeting organized by Professor R. Douglas, Director of the National Centre for Epidemiology and Population Health, ANU, on ‘Communicable Disease Surveillance.’ Canberra, 29 June 1989: ‘Surveillance in Perspective: Lessons from Smallpox.’
2. Wallace P. Rowe Lecture, given to Association of Laboratory Animal Science, Little Rock, Arkansas, 31 October 1989 (see also 143/14/2G2). Lecture as given.
3. Lecture on ‘Emerging Virus Diseases,’ at conference of the Australasian Society for Human Biology, Canberra, 4-7 December, 1989.
4. Lecture ‘Human Monkeypox’ given at Yale University, 7 November 1989. Also given at University of Colorado, 12 September 1990.
5. Lecture at WHO meeting, June 1989, on ‘Potential Hazards and constraints on the use of vaccinia virus as a live vector for vaccine’.

J. 1990
1. Gordon Meiklejohn Lecture, University of Colorado, September 24 1990 (see also 143/14/2H1).
2. Lecture at the University of Florida, September 7 1990, ‘The Eradication of Smallpox and Lessons for the Future in Animal and Human Health’.
3. Lecture at the University of Florida, September 10 1990, ‘The Biopolitics of Vaccines’.
4. Paper ‘Lessons from Smallpox Eradication,’ given when attending the first meeting of the International Commission for Certification of the Eradication of Indigenous Transmission of Wild Polioviruses in the Americas as a consultant, Washington, 5 July, 1990. Also Agenda and list of participants.
5. Paper given as Chairman of Panel Discussion on ‘Vaccination and Control of Virus Diseases’ at International Congress for Virology, Berlin, 31 August 1990.
6. Participant (only non-US member of Panel) in IOM Research briefing on ‘Molecular Biology of Microbial Pathogenesis.’

K. 1991
1. Lecture ‘Emerging and Persistent Viruses,’ given at the Annual Meeting of the American Society for Virology, Fort Collins, Colorado, 10 July 1991.
2. Plenary lecture ‘Emerging Viruses’ given at Second Asia-Pacific Congress of Medical Virology, Bangkok, 18 November 1991.

L. 1992
1. Lecture ‘Ecological Factors Affecting Animal Viruses Crossing Host Boundaries,’ for symposium on Emerging Virus Diseases, held during meeting of the Australian Society for Microbiology in Sydney, July 1992.
2 A. Lecture ‘The WHO Global Smallpox Eradication Programme: Vaccine Supply and Variola Virus Stocks’ given at ‘Vaccines for Peace’ symposium, Berlin, September 1992.
B. Photographs of participants.
3. Paper for the Fifth Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference in Medical Research, John Curtin School of Medical Research, 22-25 September 1992: ‘The Changing Impact of Pathogens on Human Populations.’
4. Lecture at symposium at Veterinary Faculty 9 November, after Docteur honoris causa ceremony at the University of Liege.

M. 1993
1. 500th CRES seminar ‘History of Myxomatosis: Environmental Saviour or Environmental Threat’.
2. Macfarlane Burnet Oration, Macfarlane Burnet Centre, Fairfield Hospital, Melbourne, 10 February 1993. ‘History of Myxomatosis’. (see also 143/14/2I),
3. Address, Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases, Canberra, 8 March 1993: ‘Viral Zoonoses: Hantaviruses.’
4. Opening paper, Rabbit Haemorrhagic Disease Workshop, Australian Animal Health Laboratory, September 16-18 1993. ‘Biological Control of the Rabbit in Australia: the Lessons of History’. Abstract and material used as slides.

N. 1994
1. Lecture at Eric French 80th birthday conference, 9-10 July 1994. ‘ICNV 1966 to ICTV 1994: the Contribution of Veterinary Virology’ (published in Veterinary Microbiology, 1995).
2. Address at banquet, Eric French 80th birthday conference.
3. Special School Seminar, JCSMR: ‘Life among the Poxviruses: Remembrance of Times Past’, November 15 1994.
4. Talk at Sixth Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference on Medical Research, 30 November, 1994: ‘Benediction’.

O. 1995
1. Address at festschrift for David White, 13-2-95, plus a follow-up letter from White.
2. Address at AMRAD Post-Doctoral Award Dinner. I was given luxurious accommodation at Windsor Hotel, plus two bottles of Grange Hermitage in the room.
3. Opening address at Fenner Environment Conference, 13-16 November 1995, ‘Risk and Uncertainty in Environmental Management’, plus card of sympathy for Bobbie, signed by participants.
4. Address at unveiling of bust of Florey, unveiled by Chief Minister, Kate Carnell, 18-12-95, plus letter from the sculptor, John Dowie, a friend of mine when we were students in the same classes at Rose Park Primary School.
5. Talk at dinner for 21st birthday of CRES.

P. 1996
1. Address and unveiling at new Infectious Diseases Laboratories at the Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science in Adelaide, with photo of FF unveiling the wall-plate.
2. Address: ‘Malaria Control in Papua New Guinea during the Second World War’, at conference ‘Strategies against Malaria, Eradication or Control’ at Annecy, France, 16-20 April 1996.
3. Remarks made at the launch of The Australian Academy of Science: the First Forty Years, at the Academy AGM, 2 May 1996.
4. Address at celebration of bicentenary of Jenner's vaccination. Conference in Adelaide, 14 May 1996. I also cut the very large birthday cake (photo at home).
5. Address at Jenner Bicentenary meeting in Tokyo. 25-26 May 1996.
6. After-dinner address at the Gala Dinner in the Great Hall of the Art Gallery of Victoria, at the retirement of Jacques Miller, Don Metcalf and Gus Nossal. I worked hard at this and spoke without notes. It was the best address that I have ever given. Attached also some congratulatory letters from participants.
7. Address at launch of book Survival, Health and Wellbeing into the Twenty-first Century, produced by Nature and Society Forum, 28 August 1996.
8. Address at dinner of Australian Parliamentary Association for UNICEF, 16 September 1996.
9. Opening remarks at Seventh Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference in Medical Research: ‘Molecular Mechanisms in Cancer’, 27-28 September 1996.
10. Opening remarks at Twelfth Fenner Conference on the Environment ‘Sustainable Habitation in the Rangelands’ 29-30 October 1996.
11. Address, Annual Seminar of the Canberra Region Medical Foundation Ltd., 8 October 1996.

BOX 14
Q. 1997
1. Workshop at Australian Animal Health Laboratories, 29 April 1997. Address on coevolution of rabbit calicivirus and rabbits.
2. Edwin Lennette Lecture, American Society for Virology, 20 July 1997.
3. Anti-rabbit Research Foundation of Australia annual meeting, Adelaide 23 September 1997. Address: ‘History and Coevolution of Myxomatosis.’
4. Paper, Australian Wildlife Management Conference, Armidale, 27 November 1997. ‘Rabbit Calicivirus in Perspective.’
5. Book launch, Barwon Park, Vic., 16 December 1997. Book by B. Coman: Rabbit Control and Rabbit Calicivirus Disease and booklet Barwon Park.

R. 1998
Several addresses during 1998 are in file 143/19/5 which deals with the Florey Centenary Year celebrations.
1. Opening address, Second International Conference on Mycobacterium ulcerans, Melbourne 1-3 April 1998. Lecture plus photos of slides.
2. Opening remarks, 8th Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference in Medical Research, 20-22 May 1998.
3. Note in Curtinraiser, in-house newsletter of JCSMR, to mark the 40th anniversary of the opening of building by Lord Florey.
4. Launch of book Lamarck's Signature by Steele, Lindley and Blanden, 15 September 1998.
5. Remarks at presentation of 1997 Frank Fenner Medal to Dr Simon Hogan.
6. Summary of life of Howard Florey produced for the National Portrait Gallery exhibit.
7. Opening remarks, Howard Florey Centenary Symposium on Helicobacter pylori, 21 September 1998
8. Editorial and article for Howard Florey number of Microbiology Australia, July 1998.

S. 1999.
Several addresses during 1999 are in file 143/20/5, which deals with the Burnet Centenary Year celebrations.
1. Address at launch of book Of Beauty Rich and Rare: Fifty Years of CSIRO Wildlife and Ecology, 17 February 1999.
2. Lecture to postgraduate course on ‘Early Days of Transplantation’ given at JCSMR, organized by Transplantation Society of Australia and New Zealand, April 1999.
3. Opening address, 15th Fenner Conference on the Environment, 2 May 1999.
4. After-dinner speech at farewell to Henry Nix as Director of the Centre for Resouce and Environmental Studies, 1 June 1999.
5. Address ‘Recent Developments in Video Histories of Australian Scientists’ at AGM of the Australian Foundation for Science, 16 November 1999.
6. Book review of Birth of the Cell, by Henry Harris, for journal Immunology and Cell Biology.
7. Derrick Mackerras Lecture, Queensland Institute for Medical Research, October 12 1999. ‘Disease Eradication and Bioterrorism – Opposite Ends of a Public Health Spectrum’.
8. Lecture ‘Burnet’s identification of Derrick’s Q fever agent, at Burnet Memorial Symposium, QIMR, 13-14 October 1999.
9. Lecture ‘Viruses, Rabbits and Wildlife’ at CSIRO Division of Wildlife and Ecology (second of a year-long series to celebrate the 50th birthday of the Division).
10. Article on Burnet for the National Portrait Gallery exhibit on Burnet, Macnamara and Clunies Ross.
11. Note on Burnet for the 1998-99 Annual Report of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute.
12. Lecture given to medical audiences in Taipei and Khaohsiung, June-July 1999.

T. 2000.
1. After-dinner address at Canberra Medical Society, 15 November 2000, ‘Reflections on the Life of Macfarlane Burnet.’
2. Comments at AGM of Australian Foundation for Science on video histories of Australian scientists, 27 November 2000.

U. 2001.
1. Lecture for Nature and Society Forum teleconference ‘Food for healthy people and a healthy planet.’
2. Lecture to Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases ‘Then and Now – a Global Perspective [of viral diseases]’, Melbourne, 7-11 April 2001.
3. Review of book The Eradication of Smallpox, by H. Bazin, for the Quarterly Reviews of Biology.
4. Lecture at National Museum of Australia ‘Scientists versus Rabbits’, 12 August 2001, and accompanying press reports.
5. Obituary of Kevin Lafferty, ANU Reporter, The Canberra Times, Immunology and Cell Biology, July and August 2001.
6. After-dinner speech, 50th anniversary of rabbit control in Australia, and accompanying press release etc.
7. Lunch-time address to U3A audience ‘Foot-and-Mouth Disease’, 30 October 2001.

V. 2002
1. Lecture at Australian Science Teachers Symposium, 17 January 2002. ‘Medical Science Overview’.
2. Response to Clunies Ross Lifetime Contribution to Science Award, 7 March 2002.
3. Speech and photographs at launch of Judy Campbell’s book The Invisible Invaders, 22 March 2002. Review in The Canberra Times, 11 May 2002.
4. Letter (with G.L. Ada) to Medical Journal of Australia on curiosity-based research, 4 March 2002.
5. Lecture to public health students and staff at the University of Sydney (arranged by Bruce Armstrong), ‘Smallpox and its Eradication’.
6. Scientific American, March 2002. Material with telephone interview used by Daniel Grossman.
7. Plenary lecture at Opening ceremony of the 8th Conference of the Western Pacific Chemotherapy and Infectious Diseases Society, Perth, W.A., 1 December 2002. “What has History Taught Us about Infectious Diseases?”.
8. Obituary, Sir Walter Crocker, Newsletter, Sustainable Population Australia, December 2002.

4. Newspaper Interviews.
Clippings from newspapers, the ANU Reporter, etc., dealing with general matters and arranged chronologically. Articles dealing with specific topics, e.g., smallpox eradication, the Smallpox book and Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conferences on Medical Research, are filed in 143/16, 143/17 and 143/24/4 respectively.
A. ANU Reporter, just after my retirement in December 1979.
B. September 1980, article in Straits Times at time of Malaysian Scientific Association Silver Jubilee.
C. JCSMR Open Day, November 1980.
D. ‘Reminiscences’, ANU Reporter, 1 May 1981
E. Honolulu Star Bulletin, 28 August 1981, at time of a conference of the consequences of migration in the Asia-Pacific region.
F. The Canberra Times, on occasion of 1982 conference ‘Viral Diseases in South-East Asia and the Western Pacific’, organized in my honour by John Mackenzie.
G. About 1985, article on vaccination, featuring FF and Gordon Ada.
H. The Age, 28 October 1985, commenting on the last case of smallpox in Bangladesh in 1975.
I. The Canberra Times, 23 December 1987, celebrating my receipt of the first copy of Smallpox and its Eradication, brought to me by Gordon Ada on his return from a meeting at WHO, Geneva.
J. MedScience, 1 February 1988, with photos and article on Smallpox and its Eradication (see 143/14/4I, above).
K. The Age, 8 April 1988, commenting on proposals to destroy stocks of smallpox virus.
L. Sydney Morning Herald, July 1988, article on myxomatosis.
M. August 1990, Med-Report, profile of FF before VIII International Congress of Virology in Berlin.
N. July 1992, article in Sun-Herald, by Peter Pockley, on myxomatosis and AIDS, with photo of FF, at ASM Congress
O. January 1993, interview by Julian Cribb on emerging diseases, in The Australian, 6 January 1993.
P. The Canberra Times, 18 February 1993; article on myxomatosis at time of FF giving 500th CRES seminar (see also 143/14/3M1).
Q. ANU Reporter, The Canberra Times and The Australian: reports on Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference, 28-29 November 1994, to celebrate my 80th birthday (see also file 143/24/4H2).
R. Sydney Morning Herald, 18 October 1995. Comment on myxomatosis, just after escape of rabbit calicivirus from Wardang Island.

S. The Canberra Times, 30 January 1995, commenting on deferral of WHA proposal to destroy remaining stocks of smallpox virus.
T. QANTAS The Australian Way, November 1995, Barry Jones on 75 Australian High Flyers.
U. The Australian Good Weekend, 10 February 1996.iinterview with Peter Cotton, with large profile photo of FF.
V. The Canberra Times, 15 October 1997, interview with Susan Parsons on garden, with photo of FF and Marilyn.
W. The Age, 17 December 1997, Nick Newland and FF on occasion of launch of booklet on rabbit calicivirus, at Barwon Park, Vic, where wild rabbits were introduced in 1859.
X. The Canberra Times, 6 March 1998, at NSF Howard Florey Symposium on sociocultural changes and infectious diseases.
Y. National Graduate, Summer 1998. Front cover: cartoon of FF by Pat; article inside; originals of two cartoons.
Z Florey Centenary number of The Australian, 24 September 1998, with account of Florey and The Australian’s ten scientific ‘Miracle makers’, which includes FF.
AA. Similar selection of ‘Australia’s scientific pantheon’ in The Advertiser, 24 February 1998.
BB. Celebration of the fiftieth anniversary of my appointment as Professor of Microbiology in JCSMR.
1.. Photo of FF in front of the JCSMR.
2. The Canberra Times, 30 July 1999.
3. The Sydney Morning Herald, 31 July 1999.
4. Curtinraiser, August 1999.
5. ANU Reporter, 18 August 1999.
6. Australasian Science, September 1999.
7. Menu, attendees, apologies for dinner at University House, 29 July 1999.
8. My response to after-dinner remarks by Vice Chancellor Terrell, Ian Marshall, Stephen Boyden and Gordon Ada.
9. Comment by Gwen Woodroofe.
CC. The Canberra Times, 25 November 1999. Portrait of FF by Mathew Lynn, unveiled by Health Minister Wooldridge on 24 November 1999. Also colour xerox of the portrait.
DD. The Age, 27 May 1999. Article on Burnet by Larry Altman (of the NY Times), after interview with FF; largely on the human myxomatosis inoculations.
EE. The Canberra Times, 3 September 2001; 75th Anniversary number. Included ‘The 75 Faces of Canberra’, with FF under ‘Education.
FF. The Age, 5 November 2001. Discussion about risk of smallpox bioterrorism.
GG. The Times (London), 19 November 2001. Quotes FF on vaccine immunity.
HH. The Canberra Times, 9 February 2002, article on efficacy of smallpox vaccination.
II. The Canberra Times, March 2002. Article on Burnet’s association with biological warfare advice to government, after discussion with FF.

5. Transcripts of Radio and Video (TV) Interviews since 1980 (for tapes, see 143/24).
A. Transcript of interview by Earle Hackett for ‘The Body Program’, ABC National Radio, 23 June and 2 July 1980.
B. Edited transcript of interview by Daniel Connell, for the ANU Oral History Archive Number 05, 21 and 28 May, 1990.
C. Edited transcript of video interviews for Australian Academy of Science by Max Blythe, 1992 and 1993.
D. Norman Swan: ‘The Health Report’, ABC National Radio, Discussion of monkeypox, by several people including FF, 1 September 1997.
E. Edited transcript of interview by Ann Moyal for the National Library of Australia, 8 March and 4 April 2001.
F. Edited transcript of radio interview by Peter Thompson for the ‘Big Ideas’ Program, ABC National Radio, broadcast July 2002 and again on 1 January 2003.

BOX 15.

6. Books (other than on Myxomatosis (see files under 143/9) and Smallpox (see files under 143/17)
A. Third Edition of The Biology of Animal Viruses.
Correspondence referring to the first and second editions of The Biology of Animal Viruses is contained in 143/8/5G and 143/10/8B respectively. The second edition of The Biology of Animal Viruses was published in 1974 and was a great success, selling over 11,000 copies by mid-1979. I had first raised the idea of a third edition with the co-authors in 1977, and said then that we needed to add a good molecular virologist. By 1979 it looked as though Joe Sambrook would do this. By January 1981 he had indicated that he would take on the job of senior author. White, Mims and I worked hard on various chapters assigned to us as primary authors, but by mid-1982 Sambrook had indicated that he would not be able to act as senior author. Then in March 1992 he pulled out altogether, which annoyed his colleagues. We decided then not to produce a third edition of The Biology of Animal Viruses, but to make use of what Mims and White had done when they reworked some chapters and incorporated this and some of what I had done on the basic characteristics of viruses to produce a book entitled Viral Pathogenesis and Immunology by C.A. Mims and D.O. White, which was published in paperback by Blackwell Scientific Publications in 1984. The file contains most letters between us over the period mid-1977 to mid-1983, arranged chronologically.
B. Veterinary Virology, first edition.
Earlier papers on my textbooks in virology are labelled ‘Papers on Medical Virology, First and Second Editions’ (143/10/8A). However, they contain little except reviews and comments on the published volumes, and discussions about translations. I have kept much more material from the correspondence that led up to the production of Veterinary Virology.
There were ultimately six authors: FF, David White, a medical graduate who was Professor of Microbiology in the University of Melbourne and who had collaborated with me in producing Medical Virology, Peter Bachmann, a veterinarian of the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität Munich (who died before the book was completed), Paul Gibbs, a veterinarian in the University of Florida at Gainesville (who had been asked by Academic Press to review the proposal to produce such a book), Fred Murphy, who was Associate Dean of the Veterinary School at Fort Collins when the book started but then moved to the Centers for Disease Control in Atlanta, and Michael Studdert, of the Veterinary School of the University of Melbourne.
The material in this section, which is contained in files 143/14/6B1-9, comprises early letters to Academic Press concerning the idea of producing a companion textbook to Medical Virology for veterinary students and the process of selection of the co-authors, files of letters to the co-authors as a group and individually, reviews, and data on sales. Correspondence with the publisher and overseas authors was complemented by visits to each on several occasions during the production of the book. Arrangements with Michael Studdert and David White were made during personal visits and by telephone rather than by letter.
Most of the specific comments on draft chapters were made on the drafts, which were discarded as new drafts were produced. As well as producing the first drafts of several Part I chapters, I coordinated the writing, produced the first version on my word processor, prepared the illustrations using material submitted by various authors and where necessary had line drawings made by the cartographer who prepared the line drawings for Smallpox and its Eradication, Kevin Cowan (Geography Department, Faculties, ANU). I also corrected page proofs and prepared the Glossary and Index.
1. Early correspondence with Academic Press about the idea, January 1978 to September 1979.
2. Agreement with 5 co-authors, signed in June 1983 (Bachmann was added to co-authors later; file 143/20/4)
3. Correspondence with Eric French about possible co-authors, June –September 1978.
4. Correspondence with J.J. Callis about possible co-authorship, October-November 1978 (declined)
5. Correspondence with E.P.J. Gibbs about possible co-authorship, August 1980 to July 1982.
6. Correspondence with F.A. Murphy about possible co-authorship, February 1979 to February 1982.
7. Correspondence with P.A. Bachman about possible co-authorship, November 1983 to May 1984.
8. Selection of correspondence between Fenner and all authors on various aspects of writing and production of the book.
9. Selection of correspondence with individual authors
A. Correspondence with Peter Bachmann, June 1984 to May 1985. He died on 26 May 1985.
B. Correspondence with Paul Gibbs, subdivided into B1, 1982-83; B2, 1984; B3, 1985; and B4, 1986-87.
C. Correspondence with Fred Murphy, subdivided into C1, 1982-83; C2, 1984; C3, 1985; C4 1986, C5 1987.
D. Correspondence with Michael Studdert, subdivided into D1, 1982-84; D2, 1985; D3, 1986; D4, 1987
E. Correspondence with David White, subdivided into E1, 1983-84; E2, 1985-86.
10. Death of Peter Bachmann.
A. Correspondence.
B. In Memoriam and Dedication in Veterinary Virology.
11. Promotional material, reviews, and Spanish edition of the First Edition of Veterinary Virology.
C. Second Edition of Veterinary Virology, published February 1993
Since the reviews and sales of the first edition had been so good (see 143/14/6B11), Academic Press and the authors decided to produce a second edition, to be published in 1992, and on 25 September 1990 we signed an agreement to submit a manuscript in December 1991, to be produced as a book of 675 pages. Because of Peter Bachmann's death we asked Professor Rudolf Rott, Director of the Institut für Virologie, Justus-Liebig-Universität, Giessen, Germany, to become an author, thus maintaining a connection with European veterinary virology. All authors except Gibbs took advantage of meeting at the VIIth International Congress for Virology in Berlin in August 1990 to discuss the book. We agreed to maintain the same structure of chapters as in the first edition, with minor amendments. We pressed Academic Press for colour photographs of clinical and some laboratory material, but were able only to obtain agreement for a colour Frontispiece, for which we used a high resolution illustration of the structure of the virion of foot-and-mouth disease virus.
In the event it took a few months longer than we had hoped to produce a satisfactory manuscript, which was submitted to the publisher in April 1992 and published in February 1993. By rigorous pruning, for which I was responsible, since all drafts were finalized on my word processor, we kept the length to 665 pages, compared with 660 pages for the first edition.
The pattern of writing was similar to that used in the first edition, with one or rarely two authors being given responsibility for the production of a draft, which was sent to me, and then after editing and discussion with the primary author, to all other authors. I then collated comments sent to me and after further correspondence with the primary author (and occasionally other authors) finalized the draft, organized the illustrations and permission letters, sent the completed manuscript to Academic Press, and then corrected proofs and prepared the index.
Since much of the very extensive correspondence with other authors was written on early drafts of chapters, which have been discarded, in these archives I have included only correspondence with Shirley Light, the Senior Editor of Academic Press in Orlando, Florida, with whom we dealt, and Mike Early, at Academic Press San Diego, who was the Production Editor, and the early correspondence with authors.
1. Correspondence with Shirley Light, Academic Press
2. Agreement with Academic Press
3. Correspondence with authors prior to writing. The extensive and detailed discussions with authors as chapters were written has been discarded.
4. Promotional material and arrangements for German translation of 2nd edition of Veterinary Virology.
5. Reviews of 2nd edition of Veterinary Virology.

D. Third Edition of Veterinary Virology, published February 1999
At the Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference on Medical Research in November 1994 (see file 143/23/4H) on the occasion of my 80th birthday, David White and I withdrew from authorship of both Medical Virology and Veterinary Virology. Fred Murphy took over as senior author, and the third edition of Veterinary Virology was published in 1999, with the enclosed tribute to David and me.

BOX 16.
E. Third Edition of Medical Virology, published February 1986
Data on first and second editions of Medical Virology is contained in files 143/10/7A and 143/11/7. For the third edition, I suggested that since i was getting out of touch with contemporary virology, David White should henceforth be the senior author of Medical Virology, and he agreed. For various reasons largely connected with his university commitments and my extensive travel in connection with the WHO book, Smallpox and its Eradication, production of the third edition was delayed; instead of coming out 6 years after the second edition was published in 1976, as we had intended), it was not published until 1986.
Although I kept copies of all chapters (for the first time on disc - a Wang word processor, as well as hard copy), I did not keep correspondence systematically. As well as taking primary responsibility for several chapters, I looked after the illustrations, permissions letters, and indexing, but David White did the proof-reading.
1. Correspondence about third edition of Medical Virology with David White and with Academic Press.
2. Memorandum of Agreement
3. Promotional material for Medical Virology, 3rd edition.
4. Reviews of Medical Virology, 3rd edition.
5. Translations of Medical Virology, Chinese and sales figures of Japanese and Spanish editions.
6. An unexpected use of our most frquently borrowed figure (size and shape of virions of animal viruses).
7. Requests from authors of other publications to use plates, diagrams or tables from Medical Virology. 1987 to 1994.
8. Use made of diagram of size and shape of viruses of humans.
F. Fourth Edition of Medical Virology, published June 1994
David White and I, co-authors of Medical Virology and both among the authors of Veterinary Virology, decided to try to produce a fourth edition of Medical Virology in tandem with the second edition of Veterinary Virology. As in the third edition, White was the senior author and wrote the first drafts of some of the Part I chapters and most of the Part II chapters. I collated the final material on my word processor, prepared illustrations, and was responsible for permissions letters, proof-reading and indexing. With the experience of producing Veterinary Virology, we decided to follow the chapter structure of Part I (Principles) of that book, with 16 chapters (15 plus Chemotherapy), instead of the 12 rather longer chapters used in earlier editions of Medical Virology. As before, the book was specifically designed for medical students, and we omitted all virus families and genera that did not contain a human pathogen (Veterinary Virology covered all viruses of vertebrates), allotted a separate chapter for each family, and described each of the five viruses that cause human hepatitis in its appropriate (family) chapter.
Because White had heavy teaching commitments at critical times, writing lagged behind that of Veterinary Virology, and the manuscript was not sent to the publisher until September 1993, and published in June 1994.
As in the files dealing with Veterinary Virology, these files contain correspondence with Shirley Light of Academic Press and the Production Editor, Mike Early, and some of the many communications between Fenner and White.
1. Correspondence with Academic Press.
2. Agreement with Academic Press.
3. Correspondence with David White.
A. April 1990 to October 1991.
B. April to December 1991.
C. January 1993 to March 1994.
4. Promotional material.
5. Request to use diagrams, 1998.

G. Possible Future Editions of Medical Virology.
1. Correspondence about the fifth edition of Medical Virology, with Shirley Light (Academic Press), David White, Fred Murphy, Chris Burrell and Ian Holmes. The upshot was that Murphy should replace me as author/editor of both Medical Virology and Veterinary Virology for any new editions, and that the other authors of Medical Virology would be Burrell and Holmes.
2. Outline of my ideas on the principles behind the production of books like Medical Virology and Veterinary Virology.

H. Portraits of Viruses, edited by Frank Fenner and Adrian Gibbs, published 1988.
This book, published in 1988, arose from a suggestion from my friend and colleague Adrian Gibbs. It commenced as a series of papers in the journal Intervirology, published by Karger, which was at that time the journal of the Virology Section of the International Association of Microbiological Societies (Editor-in-Chief, J.L. Melnick). Gibbs and I discussed various virus families, members of which had played key roles in the history of virology. One or other of us (usually Adrian for plant and insect viruses and me for viruses of animals and bacteria) then wrote to scientists who had themselves played seminal roles in the history of the viruses that they wrote about. After the publication of fifteen such papers in Intervirology over the period 1979-1986, these papers were assembled, with ‘updates’ of a page or so when these were supplied, as a book of 344 pages which was published by Karger in 1988. The files contain most of the correspondence with individual authors whom I had dealt with, and with Karger about publication in book form. Much of the initial planning was done during conversations between Gibbs and myself and not committed to paper.
1. Planning the series.
A. List of suggestions and their ultimate fate.
B. Explanatory notes sent to all potential authors, correspondence between Gibbs and Harrison, letter to Melnick, Editor-in-chief of Intervirology.
2. Correspondence about individual articles that were accepted and published.
A. F. Fenner, The Poxviruses.
B. F.M. Burnet, Influenza A Virus.
C. W. Hayes, Bacteriophage Lambda; no letters available.
D. N.D. Zinder, RNA Phage.
E. B. Kassanis, Tobacco Necrosis Virus and its Satellite Virus.
F. R.E.F. Matthews, Turnip Yellow Mosaic Virus.
G. H. Fraenkel-Conrat, Tobacco Mosaic Virus.
H. J.B. Brooksby, Foot-and-Mouth Disease Virus.
I. J.L. Melnick, The Picornaviruses.
J. T.O. Diener, The Viroid.
K. F. Lehmann-Grube, Arenaviruses.
L. P. Wildy, Herpesvirus.
M. D.A.J. Tyrell, Common Colds.
N. J. Svboda, Rous Sarcoma Virus, no letters available.
O. R.M. Lister, Tobacco Rattle Virus.
3. Publication of book Portraits of Viruses, incorporating the Intervirology articles. Letters were sent to all authors suggesting that they send in a short ‘addendum’ and additional references if thought desirable.
A. Correspondence with Melnick and the Karger production editor about publication as book. Initially Gibbs and I thought that it might be published in the Karger Monographs in Virology series, but Mr Karger objected; he agreed to publish it as a separate book, but could offer no royalties.
B. Promotion, reviews, sales figures.
4. Abortive attempt at second series of Portraits.
A. Fred Rapp succeeded Melnick as Editor-in-Chief of Intervirology, and was anxious to launch a second series of Portraits.
B. I tried to get papers from Shope, Anderson and Ginsberg, who had promised but not supplied articles for the original series, but failed, and the matter was never taken further.

I. Human Monkeypox, by Z. Jezek and F. Fenner, published 1988.
Human monkeypox was discovered during the smallpox eradication campaign. After the declaration of smallpox eradication in 1980, it became the major focus of activity of the Smallpox Eradication Unit under Dr Z Jezek and from 1980-86 WHO conducted intensive investigations in Zaire. A large part of Chapter 29 of the Smallpox Book was devoted to monkeypox, and Jezek produced a number of papers describing WHO's work in Zaire; I helped him with these in an editorial capacity. WHO concluded its operations on monkeypox in Zaire in 1986, and Jezek suggested that I should collaborate with him in a monograph on the subject, with me to cover virology and pathogenesis and Jezek to describe clinical features, epidemiology and ecology. Since I had had more experience with book publication, I undertook to find a publisher and carry out all dealings with the publisher, such as proof correction, obtaining Permissions, arranging illustrations, indexing etc. I decided to seek publication in ‘Monographs in Virology’ (Karger), because this would provide an assured distribution for a book that would have a restricted appeal. The files cover various aspects of the negotiations concerning publication, which were complicated because Jezek was a full-time employee of WHO.
1. Correspondence with Jezek. The letters in 1985-86 refer to papers on monkeypox for which I provided editorial comment for Jezek; letters from 1987 on refer to the monograph. Much additional collaboration occurred when I was in Geneva for other reasons and we exchanged Wang discs rather than hard copy.
2 A. Correspondence with publisher, Karger.
B. Correspondence with Jezek about publication.
C. Publishing Agreements.
3. Promotional material.
4. Reviews.

J. The Orthopoxviruses, by F. Fenner, R. Wittek and K. Dumbell, published 1989.
As I was writing the chapter on virology for the Smallpox and its Eradication in the early 1980s, I realized that for that book the requirement was a relatively simple outline of the basic science as a background to epidemiology, control and eradication. However, a great deal of information about various orthopoxviruses had been gathered which had never been reviewed. I therefore decided to produce another book for a technical audience, and sought collaboration from several other poxvirologists. The attached files provide material on this book, The Orthopoxviruses, which was eventually published by Academic Press, San Diego, in January 1989.
Originally, in July 1980, I asked Keith Dumbell and Bernie Moss to be co-authors. Dumbell accepted, Moss refused. In October 1980 I asked Sam Dales to join us, and in 1984 Riccardo Wittek. In 1986 Dales withdrew, and the final authors were Fenner, Wittek and Dumbell.
1. Correspondence with Academic Press.
2. The evolving ‘Contents’. Originally I thought to publish it in an Academic Press, London, series on medical virology. Eventually it was published by Academic Press, San Diego.
3. Promotion material.
4. Reviews of book

K. Proposed book, Death of a Disease: the Story of Smallpox Eradication, by F. Fenner and D.A. Henderson. Never completed.
Death of a Disease was to be the title of a proposed short, popular book on smallpox eradication to be written by Henderson and myself. There was little correspondence between Henderson and myself on this; for the most part we made arrangements during discussions in Geneva and Baltimore. I had early correspondence with Oxford University Press in London and Henderson wrote to several potential publishers in USA. We finally entered into a contract with Oxford University Press, New York, for a book of 125,000 words and 80 illustrations (350-400 pages). Henderson was so busy with his Deanship at Hopkins that we agreed in 1988 that I would do most of the writing but that he would review and comment on all chapters. I produced draft contents for a book of 14 chapters and drafts of the first six chapters, but by late 1988 I had lost all enthusiasm for this book and had become deeply involved in editing History of Microbiology in Australia, which turned out to be a much bigger job than I had expected. I drafted a letter to Oxford University Press, New York, for our joint signatures, pulling out of our commitment. Then in December 1990 Henderson was appointed to a senior position in the White House and all chance of his further involvement evaporated.
1. Correspondence between Henderson and Fenner, February 1988 to June 1990.
2. Agreement with Oxford University Press, New York.
3. Death of a Disease: Draft Preface, Contents, and Chapters 1, 2, 3.
4. Death of a Disease: Draft Chapters 4, 5, 6.

BOX 17.

L. History of Microbiology in Australia, edited by F. Fenner, published 1990.
In the November 1986 number of Australian Microbiologist, the journal of the Australian Society for Microbiology (ASM), Carolyn Beaton, the assistant editor, suggested that Australia’s Bicentennial year, 1988, should be marked by a special issue chronicling 200 years of microbiology in Australia. Tragically, Carolyn died in April 1987. David White, as President of the Society, prevailed on me to act as editor of a book on the topic and he acted as Chairman of an Editorial Advisory Panel to assist in the task. We enlisted the help of ‘Coordinators’ for various sections of each chapter, and in addition some 320 microbiologists supplied information which I organized and collated. Since some of these collaborators provided more material than could be accommodated within the 610 pages of the book, I promised in the preface to include such additional material in these Archives, along with glossy prints and if possible negatives of the 250 photographs of distinguished microbiologists. There are also a number of photographs of persons and of buildings and equipment that were not used. The book was produced by a friend of mine, Robert Kirk, who had taken on desktop publishing when he retired as Head of the Department of Human Biology in the John Curtin School of Medical Research. Glaxo Australia shared the cost of production with the Society, with a grant of1990 $20,000. One aspect of the low price of the book (about 1990 $12 per copy) was that Kirk had no responsibility for advertisement or promotion.
1. Carolyn Beaton’s correspondence about a History of Microbiology in Australia.
2. Early arrangements.
A. Minutes of ASM Council relating to production of the History by FF, May 1987 to July 1990.
B. Correspondence between FF and ASM Council (mainly David White, as President-elect or President).
3. Editorial Advisory Panel (‘Advisory Committee’).
4. Arrangements for production of written material.
A. Coordinators and Contributors.
B. Letterhead.
C. Articles in Australian Microbiologist about the History, and correspondence.
D. Correspondence with David White, January 1988 to June 1990.
5. Arrangements for publication by Brolga Press.
6. Promotion.
A concomitant of the very low price of this book, of which 5,000 copies were printed (which allowed ASM to distribute it free of charge to all members of the Society) was that the publisher (Brolga Press) had no advertising or similar facilities. The Society therefore carried out some promotion, with a view to ensuring that copies became available worldwide rather than only in Australia.
. A. Letters and flier sent to institutions in Australia.
B. Letters and flier sent to Departments of Microbiology in North America.
C. Letters and flier sent to Departments of Microbiology in the United Kingdom.
D. Letters relating to promotion at the VII International Congress of Virology in Berlin in August 1990.
E. Letters relating to promotion at the International Congress of Bacteriology/Mycology in Osaka in September 1990.
F. Correspondence with Glaxo Australia about promotion in trade journals.
G. Correspondence with Royal Australasian College of Physicians’ Library.
H. Correspondence with Rod Home about fliers in his Newsletter.
I. Correspondence with Executive Officer of Australian Society for Microbiology concerning sales.
7. Reviews.
8. Letters to FF and the Australian Society for Microbiology about the book.
A. Letters to FF.
B. Letters to Kerry Cox as President of ASM.

9. Chapter 1, The Early Days of Microbiology in Australia.
A. Correspondence.
1. Phyllis Rountree.
2. Dr M.-L. Hemphill, daughter of Dr Loir.
B. Photographs.
Plate 1.1 Sir William Macleay
Plate 1.2 Dr Adrien Loir
Plate 1.3 Dr Frank Tidswell
Plate 1.4 Dr Joseph Bancroft
Plate 1.5 Dr Thomas Bancroft (no copy available)
Plate 1.6 Dr Thomas Borthwick
Plate 1.7 Rodd Island Laboratories
Plate 1.8 Title page of Loir's thesis
Other photographs, not used
The Linnean Hall (Sir Wm Macleay)
Loir at work in laboratory on Rodd Island
Cartoon 1892: includes the burden of rabbits

10. Chapter 2, Teaching Institutions.
Photographs.
Plate 2.1 HD Wright
Plate 2.2 HK Ward
Plate 2.3 PM deBurgh
Plate 2.4 YE Cossart - not in file
Plate 2.5 Y-T Tchan
Plate 2.6 PR Reeves - not in file
Plate 2.7 Medical student's practical, Melbourne 1957
Plate 2.8 Research laboratory, Melbourne, 1954
Plate 2.9 T Cherry
Plate 2.10 RJ Bull
Plate 2.11 HA Woodruff
Plate 2.12 SD Rubbo
Plate 2.13 DF Gray
Plate 2.14 DO White
Plate 2.15 AJ Pittard
Plate 2.16 EI McClennan
Plate 2.17 AE Platt
Plate 2.18 N Atkinson
Plate 2.19 D Rowley
Plate 2.20 JC Thonard
Plate 2.21 VBD Skerman
Plate 2.22 JG Atherton
Plate 2.23 NF Stanley
Plate 2.24 GR Shellam
Plate 2.25 BJF Ralph
Plate 2.26 MRJ Salton
Plate 2.27 JM Vincent
Plate 2.28 GN Cooper
Plate 2.29 KC Marshall
Plate 2.30 BP Marmion - not in file
Plate 2.31 S Faine
Plate 2.32 JS Waid
Plate 2.33 EM Martin
Plate 2.34 PJ McDonald
Plate 2.35 MJ Dilworth
Plate 2.36 AD Brown
Plate 2.37 HM Garnett
Other photographs, not used
DN Love
Fluorescence microscope (de Burgh)

11. Chapter 3, Research Institutes and CSIRO.
Photographs
Plate 3.1 Aust. Inst. Trop. Med. Building
Plate 3.2 A Breinl
Plate 3.3 FM Burnet
Plate 3.4 GJV Nossal
Plate 3.5 EW Hurst
Plate 3.6 Various buildings of Walter & Eliza Hall Institute
Plate 3.7 EH Derrick
Plate 3.8 IM Mackerras
Plate 3.9 RL Doherty
Plate 3.10 FJ Fenner
Plate 3.11 GL Ada
Plate 3.12 JH Pope
Plate 3.13 Staff, Department of Microbiology, John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1961
Plate 3.14 ID Gust
Plate 3.15 NE Goldsworthy - not in file
Plate 3.16 KW Knox
Plate 3.17 JCM Fornachon
Plate 3.18 PA Trudinger
Plate 3.19 DG Catcheside
Plate 3.20 JA Gilruth
Plate 3.21 LB Bull
Plate 3.22 TS Gregory
Plate 3.23 EL French - not in file
Plate 3.24 WA Snowdon, model of building of the Australian Animal Health Laboratory and completed building.
Plate 3.25 GW Grigg
Plate 3.26 WJ Scott
Plate 3.27 JHB Christian
Plate 3.28 BT Dickson
Plate 3.29 K Helms
Plate 3.30 JK Taylor and ACD Rivett
Plate 3.31 DF Mahoney
Other photographs - not used
Original building of the Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science
First and second buildings of the Queensland Institute of Medical Research
Group: EH Derrick, MJ Mackerras, IM Mackerras

BOX 18.

12. Chapter 4, Diagnostic Laboratories and Commonwealth Serum Laboratories.
A. Medical Diagnostic Laboratories: New South Wales
1. Institute of Clinical Pathology and Medical Research, Lidcombe and Westmead Hospital.
2. Royal Prince Alfred Hospital
B. Medical Diagnostic Laboratories, Victoria
1. Microbiological Diagnostic Unit
2. Alfred Hospital
3. Austin Hospital
4. Prince Henry's Hospital
C. Medical Diagnostic Laboratories, South Australia. Adelaide Children's Hospital
D. Medical Diagnostic Laboratories, Western Australia
E. Medical Diagnostic Laboratories: Photographs.
Plate 4.1. JB Cleland
Plate 4.2. AM Murphy
Plate 4.3. MF Garner
Plate 4.4. AL Cunningham
Plate 4.5. TC Sorell
Plate 4.6. S Fisher
Plate 4.7. AH Tebbutt
Plate 4.8. RAV Benn
Plate 4.9. DD Smith
Plate 4.10. SM Bell
Plate 4.11. VP Ackerman
Plate 4.12. DC Dorman
Plate 4.13. AA Ferris
Plate 4.14. JRL Forsyth
Plate 4.15. JC Tolhurst
Plate 4.16. G Buckle
Plate 4.17. JH Gardner
Plate 4.18. KJ Harvey
Plate 4.19. R Webster
Plate 4.20. GL Gilbert
Plate 4.21. I Jack
Plate 4.22. AJL Davidson
Plate 4.23. HM Butler
Plate 4.24. DW Leslie
Plate 4.25. CTC de Crespigny
Plate 4.26. JE McCartney
Plate 4.27. KF Anderson
Plate 4.28. TW Steele
Plate 4.29. D Hansman
Plate 4.30. GW Kaminski
Plate 4.31. N Kovacs
Plate 4.32. DI Annear
Plate 4.33. ER Pavillard
Plate 4.34. GE Rich
Plate 4.35. JI Tonge
Plate 4.36. NM Gutteridge
Plate 4.37. WR Forgan-Smith
Plate 4.38. RJ Morahan
Figure 4.1. Map of Queensland: Commonwealth Health Laboratories
Photographs not used
MM Wilson
RDK Reye
DC Cowling
JRL Forsyth in laboratory
FA Tosolini

F. Veterinary Microbiology Laboratories
1. Victoria
2. Queensland
3. Western Australia
4. South Australia
5. Tasmania
6. Northern Territory

G. Plant Pathology
Historical review papers

H. Plant Pathology Laboratories
1. New South Wales
2. Victoria
3. Queensland
4. Western Australia
5. South Australia

I. Veterinary and Plant Pathology Laboratories: Photographs
Plate 4.39. HR Seddon
Plate 4.40. The Veterinary Research Institute, Parkville
Plate 4.41. HA Albiston
Plate 4.42. EM Pullar
Plate 4.43. Australian Research Institute, Yeerongpilly, old buildings
Plate 4.44. CJ Pound
Plate 4.45. GC Simmons
Plate 4.46. NA Cobb
Plate 4.47. CJ Magee
Plate 4.48. McAlpine's house, also used as his laboratory
Plate 4.49. D McAlpine
Plate 4.50. S Fish
Plate 4.51. Laboratories of the Plant Research Institute, Burnley, old and new
Plate 4.52. JH Simmonds
Photographs not used
CJ Pound at work (several)
Biological and Chemical Research Institute, Rydalmere; buildings
Oonoomba laboratories
Animal Research Institute
Jean Elder

J. Commonwealth Serum Laboratories; long contributions to its history.
1. Original contribution for the History (AH Brogan)
2. Pamphlet on 70th anniversary
3. List of Publications, 1920 to 1980.

BOX 19.
K. Commonwealth Serum Laboratories
Photographs
Plate 4.53. WJ Penfold
Plate 4.54. Jennerian Building at CSL
Plate 4.55. DT Oxer
Plate 4.56. PL Bazeley
Plate 4.57. EV Keogh
Plate 4.58. NJ McCarthy
Photographs not used
EV Keogh and HM Whyte
Bleeding horses for diphtheria antiserum (about 1920)
Diphtheria toxoid production (about 1929)
Biographical material of CSL staff, not fully used)

13. Chapter 5. Australian Contributions to Bacteriology.
There were not many contributions of historical interest beyond what was used in the book.
A. Bacterial Taxonomy (VBD Skerman)
B. Mycobacterium ulcerans
1. JA Hayman
2. Baker Institute News
C. Atypical mycobacteria (DJ Dawson)
D. Soil and Plant Bacteriology, consolidated original (AD Rovira)
E. Australian Contributions to Bacteriology: Photographs
1. Plates 5.1 to 5.21
2. Plates 5.22 to 42, plus unused
Plate 5.1. FWE Gibson
Plate 5.2, GB Cox
Plate 5.3. IG Young
Plate 5.4. RC Bayly
Plate 5.5. HW Doelle
Plate 5.6. AJ Wicken
Plate 5.7. WG Murrell
Plate 5.8. FJ Bergersen
Plate 5.9. BW Holloway
Plate 5.10. HJF Cairns
Plate 5.11. RG Wake
Plate 5.12. W Hayes
Plate 5.13. BJ Marshall
Plate 5.14. A Lee
Plate 5.15. PM Rountree
Plate 5.16. NJ Hayward
Plate 5.17. GB Mackaness
Plate 5.18. D Lush
Plate 5.19. J MacGarvie-Smith
Plate 5.20. HR Carne
Plate 5.21. S Dodd
Plate 5.22. AW Turner
Plate 5.23. HW Bennetts
Plate 5.24. KG Johnston, WIB Beveridge, CH Gallagher, JR Egerton
Plate 5.25. AW Rodwell
Plate 5.26. GS Cottew
Plate 5.27. RVS Bain
Plate 5.28. L Hart
Plate 5.29. RJ Moir
Plate 5.30. Clover +/- nodulation
Plate 5.31. JM Vincent, with K Baird, L Ward, JS Bunt, J McPhillips, AD Rovira
Plate 5.32. J Brockwell
Plate 5.33. CD Parker
Plate 5.34. GD Bowen
Plate 5.35. A Kerr
Plate 5.36. HL Jensen
Plate 5.37. AD Rovira
Plate 5.38. JN Ladd
Plate 5.39. RJ Swaby
Plate 5.40. LGM Baas Becking
Plate 5.41. Stromatolites - modern and fossil
Plate 5.42. EJ Ferguson Wood
Photographs not used
Gordon HG Davis
R Robins-Browne
JL O’Connor
Rhizobium cultures for field inoculation

14. Chapter 6. Australian Contributions to Virology
Although eventually all was produced under the heading ‘Animal Virology’, mostly by viral families, material for this section was collected as ‘Medical Virology’ (coordinators: Fenner and White) and ‘Veterinary Virology’ (coordinator: French). As with the previous chapter, there is little to be filed here except the photographs.
A. Handbook: Epidemic Polyarthritis (Ross River Virus Disease).
B. Letter RJ Best to FJ Quirk concerning award of Nobel Prize to WM Stanley, rather than SJ Best or Bawdin.
C. Australian contributions to virology: photographs
Plate 6.1. FM Burnet at University of Wisconsin, 1952
Plate 6.2. WG Laver
Plate 6.3. PM Colman, TA Dopheide, RG Webster, CM Ward
Plate 6.4. GW Both, PA Underwood, MJ Sleigh, BA Moss
Plate 6.5. SNEE Fazekas de St Groth
Plate 6.6. ID Marshall
Plate 6.7. TD StGeorge
Plate 6.8. JS Mackenzie
Plate 6.9. RA Hawkes
Plate 6.10. EG Westaway
Plate 6.11. L Dalgarno
Plate 6.12. CA Mims
Plate 6.13. RV Blanden
Plate 6.14. WK Joklik
Plate 6.15. Workers on myxomatosis
Plate 6.16. CJ Burrell
Plate 6.17. MJ Studdert
Plate 6.18. JM Sabine
Plate 6.19. PB Spradbrow
Plate 6.20. RH Johnson
Plate 6.21. PD Cooper
Plate 6.22. RF Bishop
Plate 6.23. IH Holmes
Plate 6.24. NA Gregg
Plate 6.25. AJD Bellett
Plate 6.26. PC Doherty
Plate 6.27. RJ Best
Plate 6.28. JG Bald
Plate 6.29. LL Stubbs
Plate 6.30. RIB Francki
Plate 6.31. AJ Gibbs
Plate 6.32. RH Symons
Photographs not used
BM Gorman
AJ Della-Porta
G Samuel and RJ Best (others used)
PM Colman and FM Burnet (others used)

15. Chapter 7. Australian Contributions to Mycology.
A. Original of Biochemistry and Genetics of Mitochondria, by AW Linnane and P Nagley, which was much too long.
B. Original of Medical Mycology, by D Ellis et al., which was much too long.
C. Original of Veterinary Mycology, by MD Connole, which was much too long.
D. Correspondence with J Simpson, the only person who did not deliver (see blank page at end of Chapter 7). The annotations on the letter record some but not all occasions on which I rang Simpson and was promised that the material was ‘in the mail’ etc. (FF)
E.: Photographs
Plate 7.1. JAJ Pateman
Plate 7.2. MJ Hynes
Plate 7.3. S Marzuki, P Nagley, AW Linnane, HB Lukins
Plate 7.4. GD Clark-Walker
Plate 7.5. D Frey, M Maslen, M Ridley, R McAleer, DH Ellis, MD Connole
Plate 7.6. AW Shipton
Plate 7.7. WL Waterhouse
Plate 7.8. IA Watson
Plate 7.9. GG Samuel
Plate 7.10. SD Garrett
Plate 7.11. NT Flentje
Plate 7.12. LR Fraser
Plate 7.13. WJ Moller
Plate 7.14. KO Muller
Plate 7.15. IAM Cruickshank
Plate 7.16. JH Warcup
Plate 7.17. DM Griffin
Plate 7.18. JI Pitt
Plate 7.19. J Walker

BOX 20.
16. Chapter 8. Australian Contributions to Protozoology.
A. Additional Reading: Supplement to Parasitology Today, July 1986.
B. Photographs.
Plate 8.1. IM Mackerras and MJ Mackerras
Plate 8.2. GAM Heydon
Plate 8.3. RH Black
Plate 8.4. GF Mitchell
Plate 8.5. LL Callow

17. Chapter 9. Industrial Microbiology.
A. Photographs.
Plate 9.1. NF Millis
Plate 9.2. RA Bottomley
Plate 9.3. MIB Dick
Plate 9.4. BC Rankine
Plate 9.5. Penicillin production at CSL: bottles and towers
Plate 9.6. Salk poliovaccine production at CSL
Plate 9.7. AF Webster

18. Chapter 10, National Activities Concerned with Microbiology
A. The Quarantine Service
1. Animal quarantine
2. Plant quarantine
B. Reference Laboratories and WHO Collaborating Centres
1. Contribution on diagnostic mycobacteriology (DJ Dawson, H Dagnia)
. 2. WHO Collaborating Centres (from WHO)
C. Communicable Diseases Intelligence (I Jack)
D. Photographs.
Plate 10.1 Composite of 16 office-bearers of ASM
10.1A. R Mushin
10.1B. JR Harris
10.1C. LS Walters
10.1D. MF Warburton
10.1E. JA Howard (nee Waltho)
10.1F. VF Hope
10.1G. JI Pitt
10.1H. IP Griffith
10.1I. IM Cheyne
10.1J. LV Asche
10.1K. VA Stanisich
10.1L. PA Wood
10.1M. TI Crossen
10.1N. T Duxbury
10.10. KO Cox
10.1P. JJ Finlay-Jones
Plate 10.2. MG Noonan
Plate 10.3. JM Goldsmid
Plate 10.4. CP Beaton
Plate 10.5. PR Stewart
Plate 10.6. JHL Cumpston
Plate 10.7. DJ Dawson
Plate 10.8. SF Dixon
Plate 10.9. JW Tapsall
Plate 10.10. CJ Martin
Plate 10.11 NH Fairley
Plate 10.12. FE Williams
Plate 10.13. E Ford
Photographs not used
E Ford and K Clinton

19. Chapter 11. International Activities of Australian Scientists
A. The International Union of Microbiological Societies
B. Virus Information Exchange Newsletter (JS Mackenzie)

M. The Australian Academy of Science: The First Forty Years, edited by F. Fenner, published in 1995.
In 1993 I suggested to the Executive Secretary of the Australian Academy of Science that I should update the extensive Appendices of The Australian Academy of Science: The First Twenty-Five Years, in preparation of publication of a history celebrating the Academy’s jubilee in 2004. However, noting that The First Twenty-five Years was then out of print, he suggested that I should update and revise the whole book. The co-editor of The First Twenty-five Years, Lloyd Rees, had died in August 1989, and I agreed to do this. With the guidance of a small Advisory Committee (Fellows R.W. Crompton, L.T. .Evans, N.H. Fletcher and Editor of Historical Records of Australian Science, R.W. Home), the book was published in 1995. In the same format as the previous book, it grew from 286 to 503 pages.

N. History of the John Curtin School of Medical Research: 1948 – 1998, by F. Fenner and D.R. Curtis, published November 2001.
Early in 1997 I received a letter from the publishers Allen & Unwin, of Sydney, suggesting that I should write a ‘History of the John Curtin School of Medical Research’, which they would publish. I declined, but later took up the idea of producing such a book with David Curtis, who started at the School as a research student in 1954 and ended up as Director in 1989-92, as co-author/editor. After preliminary discussions, in December 1998 we sent a letter to the Director, Stephen Redman, which was approved by Faculty Board early in 1999. Like the History of Microbiology in Australia, the book was produced by Bob Kirk, of Brolga Press, Gundaroo, and launched by Dr Barry Jones on 15 November 2001. It was distributed free to all present and as many of the former staff and students as it was possible to contact.
1. Correspondence with Allen & Unwin.
2. Preliminary thoughts about a book to be co-authored with David Curtis, mid-1998.
3. Note for Faculty Board and my response. In the event, we did not bring in Stephen Foster – he was too busy with a new job.
4. Letter to David Curtis with more advanced structure plan, September and November 1999.
5. Sample letter of the type sent to contributors to Part II, and list of prospective contributors.
6. Letters concerning donations to ANU of a total of $60,000, over three years, to cover publication costs.
7. Media release and newspaper comments concerning launch.
8. Photographs of the launch.
9. Photographs in book, by chapter.
A. Chapter 1. The Origins of the John Curtin School of Medical Research.
Figure 1-1. H.W. Florey
Figure 1-2. R.D. Wright
Figure 1-3. A.A.J. Conlon
Figure 1-4. H.C. Coombs
Figure 1-5. J.J. Curtin
Figure 1-6. The Academic Advisers: H.W. Florey, M.L. Oliphant, R.W. Firth, H.K. Hancock
B. Chapter 2. Recruitment and Growth, 1948-56.
Figure 2-1. Eccles, Ennor, Albert, Fenner, and Lab manager, A.F. Bunker
Figure 2-2. A.F. Bunker
Figure 2-3. Aerial view of ANU campus, 1953
Figure 2-4. Eccles, Albert, Fenner and Ennor discussing plans of the permanent building
Figure 2-5 Aerial view of building, early 1957
Figure 2-6. Temporary buildings and interior of temporary Workshop
Figure 2-7 Temporary laboratory buildings, completed in 1952
Figure 2-8. G.B. Mackaness
Figure 2-9. Total staff of School in early 1953
Figure 2-10. Interior view of permanent Workshop
Figure 2-11. W.K. Whitten
C. Chapter 3. First Decade in the Permanent Building, 1957 to 1967.
Figure 3-1. A.H. Ennor
Figure 3-2. Double level Medical Chemistry laboratory, Wing D
Figure 3-3. Official opening of building by Sir Howard Florey, 27 March 1958
Figure 3-4. At time of opening: view from Library Balcony
Figure 3-5. A.G. Ogston
Figure 3-6. D.G. Catcheside
Figure 3-7. F.P.J. Dwyer
Figure 3-8. E.H. Mercer
Figure 3-9. F.C. Courtice
Figure 3-10. A. Albert
Figure 3-11. F.J. Fenner
Figure 3-12. J.C. Eccles
Figure 3-13. W.V. Macfarlane
Figure 3-14. J.B. Wight and W.H. Goddard
Figure 3-15. School workshop staff in 1966, with Indian Colombo Plan technicians
Figure 3-16. Eccles at work
D. Chapter 4. Expansion:1967-73.
Figure 4-1. Ennor, farewell dinner menu
Figure 4-2. H.M. Whyte, with two other former Rhodes scholars and heads of the Kanematsu Institute, Sydney
Figure 4-3. A. R.L. Kirk; B. S.V. Boyden
Figure 4-4. D.R. Curtis
Figure 4-5. F.W.E. Gibson
Figure 4-6. D.J. Brown
Figure 4-7. G.L. Ada
Figure 4-8. L.W. Nichol
Figure 4-9. P.O. Bishop
Figure 4-10. Medical School Library before and after the extension in 1969
Figure 4-11. J.B. Smith
Figure 4-12. H.R. Kinns
E. Chapter 5. Consolidation and Review, 1974-79.
Figure 5-1. M. Denborough
Figure 5-2. W.J. Cliff
Figure 5-3. B. Morris
Figure 5-4. C.A.B. Salter
Figure 5-5. Spring Valley Farm buildings
F. Chapter 6. Reconstruction: 1980-87
Figure 6-1. R. Porter
Figure 6-2, W.F. Doe
Figure 6-3. P.C. Doherty
Figure 6-4. R.V. Blanden
Figure 6-5. H.A. McKenzie
Figure 6-6. P.W. Gage
Figure 6-7 W.R. Levick
Figure 6-8. S.J. Redman
Figure 6-9. I.G. Young
Figure 6-10. R.R. Hancock
Figure 6-11. S.A.F. Bain
Figure 6-12. V. Paral, R. Westen, S. Butterworth
Figure 6-13. G.F. Quinn
Figure 6-14. Florey exhibit
G. Chapter 7. The School under Attack, 1988-92.
Figure 7-1. D.R. Curtis(Centre) and Divisional Heads: I.G Young, R.V. Blanden, W.F. Doe and R.J. Redman
Figure 7-2. S.W. Serjearntson
Figure 7-3. P.E. Bunyan
Figure 7-4. P.D. Jeffrey
Figure 7-5. First Frank and Bonnie Fenner Conference, October 1988: G.J.V. Nossal, F. Fenner, G.L. Ada and R.V. Blanden
H. Chapter 8. Lafferty Rules, a NewApproach:1993-1998
Figure 8-1. K.J. Lafferty
Figure 8-2. P. Board
Figure 8-3. C.C. Goodnow
Figure 8-4. Opening of the Howard Florey Laboratories by Rosemary Follett
Figure 8-5. Opening of Medical Genome Centre by Dr Wooldridge; Peter Abeles at rostrum
Figure 8-6. Workshop personnel, 1993
Figure 8-7. Stores and Purchasing staff
Figure 8-8. Paul Waring and Arno Müllbacher
Figure 8-9. P. Doherty and R. Zinkernagel with their Nobel Prizes

Only photographs of persons are filed for Part 2 (from here on), and the photographs are identified by page numbers of the book.
I. Chapter 9. Biochemistry.
231. H. Rosenberg
234. J.F. Morrison
236. G. Woodrow
238. G.B. Cox
242. J.T. Edsall
246. D.J. Tremethick
248. D.A. Jans
254. J.E. Gready
J. Chapter 10. Cell Biology.
258. I.K. Buckley
260. P. Waring
262. A.J. Hapel
266. C.J. Simeonovic
267. M.F. Crouch
K. Chapter 11. Clinical Science.
277. P. Sinnett.
279. P.J. Nestel
282. N.G. Ardlie
288. P. Pavli
290. M.R.J. Kohonen-Corish
293. W.M. Burch

BOX 21
L. Chapter 12. Human Genetics.
305. S. Easteal
305. G. Chelvanayagam
308. M.A. Coggan
311. R.T. Baker
M. Chapter 13. Immunology.
322. R.M. Zinkernagel
326. A. Müllbacher
327. M.M. Simon
330. H.S. Warren
333. C.R. Parish
335. T.J. Braciale
338. A.J. Ramsay
340. P.S. Foster
343. D.O. Willenborg
347. P.J. McCullagh
348. M.W. Simpson-Morgan
348. J.N. Shelton
351. I.A. Ramshaw
351. D.B. Boyle
N. Chapter 14. Medical Chemistry.
358. G.B. Barlin
363. W.L.F. Armarego
365. J.E. Fildes
369. D.D. Perrin
371. A.M. Sargeson
O. Chapter 15. Microbiology.
375. G.M. Woodroofe
376. S.N.E.E. Fazekas de St Groth
376. R.G. Webster
378. W.G. Laver
380. H.J.F. Cairns
383. C.A. Mims
383. F.A. Murphy
383. R.T. Johnson
386. R. Ceredig
386. J.E. Allan
389. W.K. Joklik
391. J.F. Sambrook
393. P.D. Cooper
395. A.J.D. Bellett
395. A.J. Robinson
399. I.D. Marshall
403. R.A. Hawkes
405. M. Lobigs
407. I.A. Clark
P. Chapter 16. Neuroscience.
413. J.S. Coombs
413. M. Ito
415. R.M. Eccles
416. A. Lundberg
419. P.O. Andersen
419. T.A. Sears
420. R.F. Schmidt
420. W.D. Willis, Jr.
421. D. Lodge
421. G. Lacey
423. P.E. Voorhoeve
423. R.Llinas
424. K. Sasaki
424. P. Strata
425. T. van Arkel
432. J.C. Watkins
432. G.A.R. Johnston
433. P. Krogsgaard-Larsen
435. A.W. Duggan
438. G.D.S. Hirst
439. C.E. Hill
441. I.A. Hendry
443. B.G, Cleland
445. J. Stone
446. L.N. Thibos
448. G.H. Henry
448. B. Dreyer
450. J. Bullier
451. T. Maddess
453. A.S, Finkel
459. A.F. Delahunty
Q. Chapter 17. Integrative Biology.
464. K.I. Matthaei

143/14/7. Photographs of FF, alone or in groups.
A. With Carleton Gajdusek at the 10th International Congress on Tropical Medicine, Manila, November 1980.
B. Australian Development Assistance Bureau (ADAB) mission to China, November – December 1980, to investigate possibilities of Australian assistance to China.
C. Dahlem Conference, Berlin, March 1982. ‘Population Biology of Infectious Diseases’ Photo shows group on transmission.
D. Photographs taken by Dr T. Kitamura (who translated Medical Virology into Japanese), when I visited several places in Osaka, Tokyo and Tsukuba Science City.
E. At St Jude Children’s Research Hospital, Memphis, TN, with Robert Webster and Alan Granoff.
F. Photograph taken in my office at JCSMR in 1989.
G. NIH Task Force.
1. Group photograph of National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases Task Force on Microbiology and Infectious Diseases meeting at Hamilton, Montana. FF with Gordon Ada (we were the only non-Americans in the group).
2. Names of members of the Task Force.
H. FF speaking at the ‘Options for the Control of Influenza’ Conference in Cairns, May 1996.
I. Photo and program of Dahlem Conference, Berlin, April 1997, on ‘The Eradication of Infectious Diseases.’
J. Photo of FF and Isao Arita at Conference ‘Elimination and Eradication,’ Emory, Georgia, USA.
K. FF visits Group concerned with certification of the eradication of poliomyelitis in Australia, at Health Department, Canberra
L. FF at time of oral history recording by Ann Moyal for the National Library of Australia Archives, May 2001 (see file 143/14/5).

143/14/8. Other Activities during Retirement.
A. Review of ACIAR project in China
From 18 to 26 September 1988 I participated in the review of an Australian Centre for International Agricultural Research (ACIAR) project in China run by Robin Bedding (CSIRO Entomology) on the use of entomophagous nematodes for insect control. In 1991 I was asked to comment on a subsequent review of Bedding’s new research proposals.
1. Invitation to participate in review, in collaboration with Professor Qiu Shibang, former Director of the Biological Control Laboratory of the Chinese Academy of Agricultural Sciences, in Beijing.
2. Preliminary report to Dr McWilliam, Director of ACIAR.
3. Final Report, written by FF, with comments by Professor Qiu.
4. Reviewer's comments on 1991 proposals
B. Consultancy on risks of Importing Myxoma Virus into New Zealand.
On 9 August 1991 I received my first consultancy request (apart from ACIAR review -above). It came from the New Zealand, and concerned the risks associated with the importation of myxoma virus. Importation of myxoma virus was ultimately refused, primarily on the grounds of the risk to the kiwi of the importation of the European flea.
1. Invitation to act as a Technical Consultant.
2. Disease Risk Assessments of myxoma virus and of the European rabbit flea, on which I was asked to comment.
3. My comments on the Disease Risk Assessments.
4. Final decision by the New Zealand government.

C. Isao Arita and ACIH
After his receipt of the Japan Prize in 1988, Isao Arita established the Agency for Cooperation in International Health (ACIH), which set out to assist the realization of the Children's Vaccine Initiative in relation to vaccination. Meetings were held in Kumamoto, Tokyo or Kyoto most years from 1991 to 1996. I acted as Rapporteur and produced the Reports of these meetings. At his request, I also edited for English language presentation a number of scientific papers by Arita, an example of which is included.
1. Outline of ACIH
2. First meeting of ACIH, Kumamoto, 23-26 May 1991.
A. Report of International Meeting on Global Vaccine Supply.
B. Correspondence with Arita.
C. Report of Special Symposium on ‘Japan as Seen by Foreigners,’ at
which I was one of the two speakers.
3. Second meeting of ACIH, Tokyo, 3-5 August 1992.
A. Correspondence.
B. Report.
4. Third meeting of Consultative Group for the Children's Vaccine Initiative (CVI), organized by ACIH in Kyoto, 7-9 November, 1993.
A. Correspondence about meeting and agenda
B. Official CVI report of the meeting.
C. Special report on CVI Meeting, for ACIH, prepared by FF.
D. Discussions about vaccination of persons working with orthopoxviruses.
5. Report of Children's Vaccine Initiative meeting and Jenner Commemoration, 25-26 November, at Kumamoto. I acted as Rappoteur and compiled the report.

D. Celebration of the Fiftieth Anniversary of my Appointment to JCSMR.
I was appointed to be Professor of Microbiology in JCSMR on 29 July 1949. I decided to celebrate the event with a dinner at University House on 29 July 1999 (for which I paid). Also, in the same year the then Director, Stephen Redman, approached me to have my portrait painted, and suggested several possible painters. I chose Mathew Lynn, and the portrait was unveiled by Health Minister Dr Michael Wooldridge.
1. Menu and list of those at the dinner (the majority former students or members of the Department of Microbiology), reports in The Canberra Times and Curtinraiser.
2. Photograph of painting and article in The Canberra Times.

BOX 22
143/15. Diaries kept when travelling overseas.
I developed the habit of keeping diaries with daily entries on all overseas trips, except for those to Papua New Guinea (and they were numerous), New Zealand, and unfortunately, my only full year’s study leave as an Overseas Visiting Fellow at Churchill College in 1961-62.

1. Travel Diary Book 1: 1948-1949.
Entries from 19 August 1948, when Bobbie and I left to take up a Rockefeller Travelling Fellowship at the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research to 28 July 1949, when we embarked on the Queen Mary to travel to England, and subsequent travel in England and the Continent up to 2 November 1949. We returned by ship to Australia in January 1950.

2. Travel Diary Book 2: 23 May 1953 to 25 October 1953.
My first Study Leave. I travelled extensively in USA, visiting many laboratories as well as museums etc. until 23 August, when I flew to London. I visited laboratories in England, France and Scandinavia before flying back to Australia via Khartoum, Entebbe in Uganda, Johannesburg/Pretoria and Mauritius, arriving in Perth on 18 October. This was my first trip to Europe and America since taking up my appointment in Canberra; I visited the labs of almost every virologist, learning much and often giving seminars, usually about myxomatosis.

3. Travel Diary Book 3: July-August 1956.
Records daily activities on trip to Indonesia for the Department of Foreign Affairs, to investigate the possibility of establishing a medical school in Sumatra (see 143/8/5E1). Also contains the first rough draft of a Report.

4. Travel Diary Book 4: 1957; Two Trips.
A To China as a member of a group of Australian doctors (8 April to 7 May; pages 1-58, see file 143/8/5E2) and subsequently on my own to Japan (8-19 May; pages 59-77)
B. Study Leave trip to Europe and USA, 7 September 1957 to 14 November 1957 (continued in Book 5).

5. Travel Diary Book 5: 10 November to 13 December 1957.
Continuation of Study Leave diary from Book 4 (item B). First Study Leave trip since 1953. As well as visiting many virology labs and giving several seminars, I gave a Harvey Lecture in New York.

6. Travel Diary Book 6: 1963, 1964; Two Trips.
A. 3 July to 10 August1963. Visited many virology labs in USA and a few in England. Flew home with stops in Geneva (Hacketts), Rome, Beirut (Hitti), Perth, Adelaide.
B. 31 January to 31 March 1964. New York. Lecture at Perspectives in Virology meeting, Bethesda; Asilomar for conference on Genetics of Colonizing Species (myxo talk), 23 February to UK, Glasgow, Liverpool, London; then Moscow University as ANU Visiting Fellow, 1 to 31 March 1964.

7. Travel Diary Book 7: 1966, 1967, 1968; Three Trips.
A. 20 April to 12 July 1966. USA via visit to Yucatan and Mexico City. Visits to labs in USA until 13 June, then to Glasgow, where diagnosed with appendicitis and admitted to the Western Infirmary ,17 June to 3 July. Visited Liverpool and London, but had to cut the Moscow International Microbiology Congress. Home via Hong Kong, arrived 12 July.
B. 18 November to 9 December 1967. London via Istanbul, New York 27 November. Corrected proofs of The Biology of Animal Viruses (discussion with Barsky and Jacoby of Academic Press, with their suggestion of a 300-page book Introduction to Animal Virology which became Medical Virology). California, then to Honolulu for Japan-American conference on smallpox.
C. 23 March to 10 April 1968. Singapore, Israel (Rehoveth meeting), to London 31 March (ICNV meeting). Home via Teheran and Isfahan, Sydney 10 April.

8. Travel Diary Book 8: 1968, 1969, 1970; Four Trips.
A. 6 to 25 November 1968. California and New York on virology, influenza genetics conference, at Princeton, rubella vaccine conference in London.
B. 22 March to 30 April 1969. WHO monkeypox virus conference in Moscow (my first contact with the WHO Smallpox Eradication Program), Life Sciences Lecturer at University of California at Davis. Discussion with Barsky of Academic Press on Medical Virology.
C. 3 June to 3 July 1970. With Bobbie, Marilyn and sister Winn. Lilly Lecture in London. Travelled by taxi through Palestine and Israel. Marilyn and I went back together and she had birthday in Istanbul. Bobbie and Winn went to North America and I met them in Mexico City on my next trip.
D. 3 September to 7 November, USA and UK. Met up with Winn and Bobbie in Mexico City after visit to Acapulco on way. Scholar-in-Residence at State University of New York, Visited several campuses. Then several days in England.

9. Travel Diary Book 9: 1971, 1972, 1973; Four Trips.
A. 12 June to 6 July 1971, Nepal, India, Czechoslovakia (Executive Committee of ICNV) and Virology Conference.
B. 14 December 1971 to 24 March 1972. First leg of Fogarty Scholarship at NIH, stayed at Stone House, returning via Israel (Oholo Conference).
C. 6 to 22 January 1973. London, then Paris for SCOPE 5 meeting.
D. 9 to 29 April 1973. London (Executive Committee of ICNV), return via Djakarta and Bali (Helmi).

10. Travel Diary Book 10: 1973, 1974; Three Trips.
A. 3 to 23 July 1973. Copenhagen, for Summer Institute on Systems Analysis.
B. 27 September to 15 October 1973. Katmandu, London, Kiel (SCOPE General Assembly and SCOPE 6).
C. 19 November 1973 to 14 May 1974. Second leg of Fogarty Scholarship, with Bobbie. Travel via Guatemala and Yucatan, return via Europe, Mediterranean cruise, visit to Cairo and Luxor.

11. Travel Diary Book 11: 1974, 1975; Four Trips.
A. 13 to 20 October 1974. Environment meeting, Thailand.
B. 16 to 29 November 1974. SCOPE Moscow.
C. 6 to22 March 1975. IIASA Vienna, SCOPE, Paris.
D. 7 August to 11 October 1975. Climate conference, Norwich, Pacific Science Congress, Vancouver, Virology Congress, Madrid, UNEP and SCOPE meetings, Nairobi, return via South Africa.

12. Travel Diary Book 12. 1960 - 1961, 1977; NOTE TIME DIFFERENCES.
A. 2 December 1960 to 27 January 1961. Trip to India under Colombo Plan arranged by Ambassador W.R. Crocker (see 143/8/5E3).
B. 1 April to 6 May 1977. Trip to India for Certification of smallpox eradication, then to Paris for SCOPE Executive Committee (my first as Editor-in-Chief).

13. Travel Diary Book 13: 1975, 1976, 1977; Five Trips.
A. 27 November to 6 December 1975. Tokyo, meeting about the United Nations University.
B. 5 to 19 February 1976. WHO Expert Group on Monkeypox, Geneva.
C. 15 to 22 May 1976. Paris. General Assembly of SCOPE.
D. 30 June to 18 July 1976. Travel around North-west Australia and Northern Territory.
E. 1 to 24 October 1976. Washington, ICSU and SCOPE. Canada
F. 26 September to 3 November 1977. London, SCOPE Executive Committee. Geneva, Chairman of new Consultation on the Certification of Smallpox Eradication.

14. Travel Diary Book 14: 1978; Four Trips.
A. 19 January to 9 April 1978. South Africa, southwest Africa, Geneva, Nairobi (UNEP), Mozambique, Malawi, Lusaka, Geneva (SCOPE). Smallpox certification activities in South Africa (solo) and Malawi (team).
B. 3 to 21 May 1978. Poland (lectures), Moscow (SCOPE Executive Committee)
C. 10 to 22 October 1978. Johannesburg, London, Geneva. Smallpox eradication inspection, South Africa.
D. 6 November to 14 December 1978. Geneva, London, Nairobi, Geneva. Smallpox Eradication meetings, SCOPE Executive Committee.

15. Travel Diary Book 15: 1979, 1980; Six Trips.
A. 23 February to 3 March 1979. Perth (water pollution conference), Geneva (spx expert ctee meeting).
B. 7 June to 1 August 1979. Stockholm (SCOPE General Assembly), Geneva, USA, China (Smallpox Certification).
C. 16 October to 6 November 1979, Nairobi (Smallpox eradication from Africa), Geneva, Paris.
D. 18 November to 15 December 1979. .Geneva (UNEP State of Environment Report), Paris (SCOPE Executive Committee), Geneva (Final meeting, Smallpox Certification Commission).
E. 25 January to 7 February 1980. Meeting at NIH on mousepox (outbreaks in USA).
F. 3 May to 5 June 1980. Geneva (WH Assembly meeting, SPX eradication), England (discussions about Smallpox history), Washington (my first US Nat Acad Sci meeting).

BOX 23
16. Travel Diary Book 16: 1980, 1981; Six Trips.
A. 2 September to 12 October 1980. Kuala Lumpur (Lecture), Geneva (Smallpox book), Brussels (SCOPE Executive Committee), Amsterdam (Smallpox discussions), New Orleans (Infectious Diseases Society of America meeting), Cincinnati (mousepox meeting).
B. 9 to 17 November 1980. Manila (Tropical Medicine Conference and authors’ meeting on Smallpox book).
C. 24 November to 7 December 1980. China (Australian Development Assistance Bureau).
D. 25 January to 23 February 1981. Geneva (discussions on Smallpox book).
E, 23 August to 4 September 1981. Honolulu (Conference at East-West Center).
F. 11 October to 28 November 1981. India (Smallpox book discussions), Geneva (Smallpox book), Liverpool (Smallpox book discussions), London (Florey Stone speech), New York (Academic Press on Medical Virology and Veterinary Virology), Washington (discussed next and last leg of Fogarty Fellowship), Geneva (Smallpox book).

17. Travel Diary Book 17: 1982, 1983; Three Trips.
A. 25 February to 27 March 1982. Geneva via Tokyo, where I met with virologists at Tokyo, Osaka and Ysukuba to discuss poxviruses and history of smallpox and vaccination. Geneva, Smallpox book discussions, and meeting of Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections. Berlin, Dahlem Conference, Population Biology of Infectious Diseases.
B. 21 August 1982 to 26 March 1983. Geneva (Smallpox book discussions), Hamburg, Lehmann-Grube (lecture) and Otto Fenner, London, met Ross on Myxomatosis chapter, discussions with Royal Society on Florey Lecture. Washington (last spell of Fogarty Fellowship, Bobbie with me from 7 October to 4 March), Geneva (Smallpox book discussions and Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections),
C. 16 September to 18 November 1983. South Africa (Smallpox book discussions with Dumbell), Geneva (Smallpox book discussions, also Orthopoxvirus book with Wittek), Moscow (discussions with Marennikova on ‘Whitepox’ viruses), Canada (Orthopoxvirus book discussions with Sam Dales), Washington, Atlanta, poxvirus discussions.

18. Travel Diary Book 18: 1984, 1985, 1986; Six Trips.
A. 18 March to 9 April 1984. Canberra-Geneva-Munich-Canberra.
Geneva, 2 weeks for WHO Orthopoxvirus Committee and work on smallpox book; Munich 2 days for discussions on Veterinary Virology with Bachmann.
B. 25 June to 29 July 1984. Canberra-Geneva-Munich-London-Canberra.
Geneva, 4 weeks on smallpox book; Munich, 2 days for discussions on Veterinary Virology with Bachmann, also met Meier-Ewart.
C. 8 September to 1 November 1984. Canberra-Washington-London-Ireland-Geneva-Washington-San Diego-Canberra (with Bobbie).
USA, friends at Bethesda, the Vaccines Conference at Cold Spring Harbor, CDC, Orlando and Academic Press, to London then holiday trip to Ireland, Bobbie home and me to Geneva for 2 weeks on smallpox book, USA with trips to Yale and Baltimore, then Bhatt's conference ‘Viral and Mycoplasmal Infections of Rodents - I gave keynote address; San Diego on way home to visit Scripps Institute.
D. 3 to 19 December 1984. Canberra-Geneva-Canberra.
Geneva, WHO on smallpox book but rang Wittek on book The orthopoxviruses and Bachmann on book Veterinary Virology.
E. 6 June to 7 July 1985. Canberra-Tokyo-Geneva-Canberra.
Tokyo, 4 days with Arita on smallpox book and again on way back; Geneva, on smallpox book.
F. 4 November-9 December 1985. Canberra-Washington-Orlando-Gainesville-Atlanta-Geneva-London-Baltimore,-Atlanta-Gainesville-Canberra.
USA, 17 days both ways; Washington, NIH; Baltimore, Henderson on smallpox book; Orlando, Academic Press; Gainesville, Gibbs on Veterinary Virology, Atlanta, Murphy on Veterinary Virology, Geneva, 16 days on smallpox book; London, Hacketts and Royal Society Anniversary meeting and Dinner.

19. Travel Diaries Book 19: 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989; Eight Trips.
A. 18 August to 15 September 1986. Canberra-Washington Geneva-London-Liverpool-Manchester-Canberra.
USA, 12 days with National Library of Medicine, Henderson, CDC on smallpox book; 9 days Geneva on smallpox book; Liverpool, Downie and Baxby, then Manchester for Stuart Mudd Award.
B. 15 Octobe to 15 november 1986. Canberra-Geneva-Canberra.
Geneva on smallpox book, but arrived with erysipelas in right leg and bed in hotel for first week.
C. 24 April to 4 July 1987. Canberra-USA-Spain-Geneva-Canberra.
Bobbie accompanied me except for last month in Geneva. USA, AGM of National Academy of Sciences, then Boston, New York, Baltimore, Fogarty Scholars' Symposium in NIH, London then holiday in Spain/Portugal; London, then Bobbie to Canberra, FF for a month on smallpox book.
D. 5 September to 9 October 1987. Canberra-Geneva-Bellagio-Geneva-Washington-Canberra.Geneva 10 + 9 days finalizing index of smallpox book; conference at Rockefeller Bellagio on ‘Genetically Engineered Organisms in the Environment,’ week in Washington/Baltimore discussing details of short book on smallpox eradication with D.A. Henderson.
E. 13 to 17 January 1988. Canberra-Geneva-Canberra.
WHO Geneva for launch of smallpox book, also worked on Human Monkeypox book with Jezek and on orthopoxvirus book with Wittek (Lausanne).
F. 4 to 21 April 1988. Canberra-Tokyo-Osaka-Kyoto-Kumamoto-HongKong-Guilin-Bangkok-Canberra.
With Bobbie, mostly for Japan Prize ceremonies with holiday trips to Arita's home in Kumamoto, Guilin and Bangkok
G. 22 May to 11 June 1988. Canberra-Atlanta-Orlando-Washington-London-Canberra.
Atlanta, conference at opening of new high security laboratories, Orlando to see Shirley Light (Academic Press) about Medical Virology and Veterinary Virology, then NIH and Chanocks; England, with Fred Brown to Jenner Museum and Jesty's grave then Royal Society conference on ‘The Australian Contribution to Britain’ (gave paper).
H. 18 to 26 September 1988. Canberra-Beijing-Guangzhou-Canberra.
Review for Australian Council for International Agricultural Aid (ACIAR) on Bedding project with entomopathogenic nematodes.

20. Travel Diaries Book 20: 1989 to 1992; Thirteen Trips.
A. 13 to 25 June 1989. Canberra-Philadelphia-Geneva-Canberra.
Four days in Philadelphia/Charlotte (NC) as expert witness on court case about use of vaccinia virus-rabies glycoprotein recombinant for raccoon rabies control; Geneva 5 days for conference on vectored vaccines, talks with Jezek and Wittek about books.
B. 29 October to 13 November 1989. Canberra-USA-England-Canberra.
Two days Little Rock for meeting of American Association for Laboratory Animal Science Wallace P. Rowe Oration; New York, Rockefeller University; Yale University (talk); England, London then Oxford for talk and meeting with Bob May.
C. 22 to 29 April 1989. Canberra-Washington-Canberra.
Trip financed by frequent flyer points to participate in farewell to D.A. Henderson for Deanship of Johns Hopkins School of Hygiene and Public Health, then conference on eradication of poliomyelitis from the Americas.
D. 4 to 13 July 1990. Canberra-Washington-Baltimore-Canberra.
Washington for inaugural meeting of International Commission for the Certification of Poliomyelitis Eradication (paper on smallpox certification procedures), then Chanocks in Bethesda and Adas in Baltimore.
E. 22 August to 13 September 1990. Canberra-Germany-USA-Canberra.
Twelve days in Germany, International Congress for Virology in Berlin, then visits to Fenner relations in Hannover and Hamburg.; USA, Orlando for discussions with Academic Press, then Gainesville where gave two lectures, also canoed with Paul Gibbs; Denver where I gave the Gordon Meiklejohn Lecture.
F. 9 to 16 December 1990. Canberra-Geneva-Canberra.
WHO for meeting of Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections.
G. 20 to 29 May 1991. Canberra-Kumamoto-Canberra.
Meeting of Agency for Cooperation in International Health set up by Arita. Acted as Rapporteur and ‘translator’ of Japanese English. Paper at Symposium ‘Japan as seen by Foreigners.’
H. 6 to 18 July 1991. Canberra-USA-Canberra.
Fort Collins for meeting of American Society for Virology (gave paper), then to Hamilton, Montana, for Task Force on Microbiology for the 1990s (National Institute for Allergy and Infectious Diseases, NIH).
I. 16 to 23 November 1991. Canberra-Bangkok-Canberra.
Second Asia-Pacific Congress on Medical Virology (gave paper).
J. 7 to 17 December 1991. Canberra-Madrid-Canberra.
Conference of Juan March Foundation on ‘Coevolution of Viruses, their Hosts and Vectors,’ Adrian Gibbs an organizer (gave paper).
K. 4 to 11 April 1992. Canberra-Annecy-Canberra.
Conference at Pensières (Fondation Marcel Merieux) at Annecy, on ‘Emerging Infectious Diseases: Historical Perspectives.’ Met Bernardino Fantini who later wrote suggesting a history of biological control of the rabbit.
L. 2 to 8 August 1992. Canberra-Tokyo-Canberra.
Second meeting of Agency for International Cooperation on vaccine quality and supply. FF as Rapporteur.
M. 8 to 17 September 1992. Canberra-Berlin-Geneva-Canberra.
East Berlin for conference ‘Control of Dual-Threat Agents: The Vaccines for Peace Programme’ (SIPRI), gave paper. Geneva to talk with Fantini on proposed book on history of myxomatosis etc.

21. Travel Diaries Book 21: 1992 to 1996; Eight Trips.
A. 1 to 16 November 1992. Canberra-London-Brussels-Washington-California-Canberra.
9 days in Liège for Doctoris honoris causa at 175th anniversary celebrations (Pastoret-veterinary virology) gave paper at symposium, then back via USA to see Chanocks in Washington, David Regnery at Stanford and Fred Murphy at Davis.
B. 4 to 13 November 1993. Canberra-Kyoto-Canberra.
Meeting of Consultative Committee on Children's Vaccine Initiative (CVI), organized by ACIH. FF as Rapporteur for ACIH.
C. 7 to 12 September 1994. Canberra-Geneva-Canberra.
WHO for meeting of ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections.
D. 20 to 27 May 1995. Canberra-Lindon-Prague-Annecy-Geneva-Canberra.
Beattie Hackett in London, Jezek and tour of Prague, Microbe Hunters symposium in Annecy, talked with Fantini about myxomatosis book.
E. 28 November to 3 December 1995. Canberra-London-Canberra.
Originally planned as trip to London, Paris (for conference on Jenner bicentenary and Pasteur centenary, organized by Fantini and at which I was to give papers), and back via Washington, but because of Bobbie's illness was restricted to a quick trip to London to receive the Copley Medal.
F. 10 to 26 April 1996. Canberra-London-Geneva-Annecy-Geneva-Canberra.
Conference: ‘Archives of the Scientific Revolution,’ in London, then conference ‘Strategies against Malaria: Eradication or Control’ at Annecy, at which I gave a paper, then stayed on in Geneva to talk with Fantini about myxomatosis book.
G. 23 to 29 May 1996. Canberra-Tokyo-Canberra.
Conference on 200th year Commemoration of Jenner, at which I gave a paper.
H. 22 to 30 November 1996. Canberra-Kumamoto-Canberra.
Children’s' Vaccine Initiative conference, organized by Arita (ACIH).

22. Travel Diaries Book 22: 1996 to 1999; Seven Trips.
A. 3 to 26 December 1996. Canberra-Geneva-Stockholm-London-Washington-Canberra.
Invited to Nobel Prize presentation by Peter Doherty (also Gordon Ada and Bob Blanden). Visited Beattie Hackett in London, Fantini in Geneva and Chanocks in Washington.
B. 12 to 29 March 1997. Canberra-London-Berlin-Canberra.
Dahlem conference on eradication of infectious diseases. Also visited Beattie Hackett in London and Fenners in Hannover and Hamburg.
C. 11 to 25 July 1997. Canberra-Bozeman (Yellowstone)- Canberra.
Visited Yellowstone National Park with Fred Murphy and family, the American Society of Virology meeting at Bozeman at which I gave lecture.
D. 11 February to 2 March 1998. Canberra-London-Geneva-London-Washington-Atlanta-Canberra.
Visited Beattie Hackett, Fantini, Chanocks en route to Atlanta for conference on eradication of infectious diseases.
E. 26 September to 9 October 1998. Canberra-London-Oxford-London-Geneva-Canberra.
Visited Beattie Hackett, then English Florey Centenary celebrations in Oxford and London, Fantini on Myxo book. On alighting in Sydney very breathless – pulmonary embolisms and a week in Canberra Hospital.
F. 26 June to 5 July 1999. Taiwan.
Trip to Taiwan (Marilyn and self) deferred from November 1998 because of pulmonary embolism. All precautions taken, no medical problems. Taipei, Tainan, Kaohsing.
G. 29 November to 11 December 1999.. Canberra-London Geneva-Canberra.
Visited Beattie Hackett, Geneva for WHO smallpox committee meeting. All precautions but very uncomfortable and breathless on arrival Sydney. Went into hospital in Canberra, lungs OK, but I decided that this would be my last long trip.

BOX 24

143/16. Involvement in WHO Intensified Smallpox Eradication Program.
For almost the whole of my career at the laboratory bench, other than as a pathologist during my army service, I worked on poxviruses. From February 1946 until August 1948, under the guidance of FM Burnet, I worked at the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute on ectromelia virus, the causative agent of mousepox. From August 1948 to July 1949 I worked with Dr RJ Dubos at the Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research in New York on Mycobacterium tuberculosis, M. balnei and M. ulcerans; I carried out some work on these bacteria concurrently with work on myxomatosis until 1957. From 1950 until 1965 I worked mainly on myxomatosis (see files in 143/9). In 1957, with the cessation of work on mycobacteria, I began work on the genetics of vaccinia virus as a simpler laboratory model for the ultimate goal of studying the genetics of virulence in myxoma virus. In 1967 I was appointed Director of the John Curtin School of Medical Research and gave up personal research at the bench and the supervision of research students.
The WHO Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme was initiated in 1967, and in 1969 WHO set up a small committee of scientists expert in the laboratory study of poxviruses, called the ‘Informal Group on Monkeypox and Related Viruses’. I was appointed a member of that committee and served as Rapporteur at its meeting in Moscow in 1969 and Chairman for the meetings in 1976, 1978 and 1979. I missed the meetings in 1971 and 1973.
In April 1977 I served on the International Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication in India, where I was appointed Rapporteur, and in October 1977 I was appointed Chairman of a large ‘Consultation on the Worldwide Certification of Smallpox Eradication’. This led to my increasingly deep involvement with the Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme, as I was then appointed chairman of the Global Commission for the Certification of the Smallpox Eradication. The Commission met in December 1978 and December 1979. At its second and last meeting the Global Commission affirmed that smallpox had indeed been eradicated and produced a substantial Report which contained 19 recommendations for WHO responsibilities post-eradication. As Chairman of the Commission, I presented the Report and its recommendations to the Thirty-Third World Health Assembly in May 1980, where it was approved unanimously.
I retired from my university position on 31 December 1979, at age 65. Two of the recommendations of the Global Commission that had been endorsed by the World Health Assembly occupied a large part of my time for the next eight years, namely Recommendation 16: ‘WHO should ensure that appropriate publications are produced describing smallpox and its eradication and the principles and methods that are applicable’, and Recommendation 19: ‘WHO should set up a committee on orthopoxvirus infections’. I became the senior author of the book Smallpox and its Eradication and Chairman of the Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections.
Related to my work on smallpox eradication, in 1980 I received the Anzac Peace Prize, in 1986 I was awarded the Stuart Mudd Award of the International Union of Microbiological Societies, in 1988 I was awarded a WHO Medal and shared the Japan Prize (Preventative Medicine) with the first two Chiefs of the WHO Smallpox Eradication Unit, Dr DA Henderson and Dr I Arita, and in 1989 I received the Advance Australia Award and was made a Companion of the Order of Australia (see files in 143/14/2).

1. Informal Consultation on Monkeypox and Related Viruses.
In keeping with DA Henderson’s insistence that it was essential for the Intensified Program to maintain an interest in research, a small group of virologists interested in poxviruses was established by the WHO Smallpox Eradication Unit in 1969 and met in 1969, 1971, 1973, 1976, 1978 and 1979. I was Rapporteur in 1969, missed the meetings in 1971 and 1973, and was chairman in 1976, 1978 and 1979.
A. Notes of informal discussions of monkeypox virus studies, Moscow, March 1969.
B. Notes on the first suspected human monkeypox cases, December 1970.
C. Informal Consultation on Monkeypox and Related Viruses, Geneva, 1973.
D. Fourth meeting of the Informal Group on Monkeypox and Related Viruses, Geneva, February 1976.
1. Correspondence with I. Arita, Chief of the Smallpox Eradication Unit, asking me to act as Chairman.
2. Report of meeting and related papers.
E. Informal Consultation on Monkeypox, Whitepox and Related Poxviruses, Geneva November 1978.
1. Report of meeting.
2. Background papers on ‘whitepox viruses’.
F. Meeting of Study Group on Orthopoxvirus Infections, Atlanta, 26-28 June, 1979.
1. Background papers indicating reasons for meeting.
2. Report of meeting.

2. Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication.
My major contribution to the smallpox eradication campaign (as distinct from follow-up activities such as publications) was my involvement as chairman of this Commission and its predecessor, the Worldwide Consultation on the Certification of Smallpox Eradication. The Consultation met on 11 to 13 October 1977 and the Commission on 4 to 7 December 1978 and 6 to 9 December 1979.
A. Report of the Worldwide Consultation on the Certification of Smallpox Eradication. 11-13 October 1977.
1. Report, and Agenda papers Part I, to ‘Assessment and Commission Reports’.
2. Agenda papers from ‘Assessment and Commission Reports’ to end.
3. Follow-up of Consultation.
A. Photograph and letter from Dr Arita.
B. Request from the Director-General of WHO for me to attend subsequent meetings (of which I was elected Chairman) and my correspondence with ANU administration about such time out.
C. Ideas about the role of the Global Commission.
B. Report of the Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication First Meeting. 4 to 7 December 1978.
1. Report, Agenda and Working Papers (Part I).
2. Working Papers (Part II).
3. Working Papers (Part III).

BOX 25
C. Report of the Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication Second Meeting, 6 to 9 December 1979.
1. Report of Second meeting.
2. Draft Final Report.
D. Final Report of the Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication, 1980.
Photographs.
1. Members of the Global Commission.
2. Certificate signed by all members of Global Commission.
3. FF, as Chairman, signing first.

3. International Commissions for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication and Other Country Visits Concerned with Certification.
The Global Commission based its findings on the reports of a large number of International Commissions for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication, which visited countries or regions at least two years after the last known case, operating between 1973 and 1979. I participated in two of the twenty International Commissions for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication, India in April 1977, and Malawi, Mozambique, Tanzania and Zambia in March 1978. In addition, I went to South Africa as a one-man ‘International Commission’ in January 1978 and I was involved in the certification of smallpox eradication in Africa, in Nairobi in October 1979. In July 1979, together with Dr JG Breman of the WHO Smallpox Eradication Unit, I visited China to ascertain their situation in relation to smallpox eradication.
A. International Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication in India.
The initial meeting was held in New Delhi; then groups of one or two members of the Commission, a WHO regional officer, and Indian government officials visited one or two states, followed by the final meeting in New Delhi. Dr Koinange-Karuga and I were the Commission members who visited Rajasthan, Chandigarh and Himachal Pradesh.
1. Initial invitation and follow-up correspondence, 16 October 1976 to 27 April 1977.
2. Report of the National Commission for assessment of Smallpox Eradication in India, on which the International Commission’s investigations were based.
3. Agenda of first meeting and Report of the International Commission.
4. WHO Press Release and special number of the Indian journal, The Journal of Communicable Diseases.
5. Photographs, New Delhi.
6. Visits by FF to Rajasthan, Himachal Pradesh and Chandigarh.
A. My hand-written notes, made during trip.
B. Report for Rajasthan.
C. Report for Himachal Pradesh.
D. Report for Chandigarh.
E. Photographs for Rajasthan and Chandigarh.

B. International Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication in south-east Africa: Malawi, Mozambique, Tanzania and Zambia.
1. Examples of background papers.
2. Map showing places visited during FF’s trip to Malawi.
3. Final Report.
4. Photographs.
A. International Commission in Lusaka.
B. FF examining the ‘last case’ in Malawi.

C. Certification activities for South Africa and Namibia.
The political situation was complex. South Africa was a member of WHO, but in 1964 it had been deprived of the right to vote in the World Health Assembly, and the delegates had walked out. Namibia was formally a UN Mandate, but was controlled by the South African Government. For these reasons it was impossible for WHO to send an International Commission there, but the South African Government was willing to accept me as a visitor to examine the situation.
1. Arrangements for me to visit South Africa on behalf of WHO.
2. Report on my visit, 19 June to 19 February 1978.
3. Arrangements for a further brief visit in October 1978.
4. Follow-up letters to South African Health authorities to assist in preparation of their final report.
5. Final Report of South Africa to the Global Commission.
6. Final Report of Namibia to the Global Commission.

D. Certification of Smallpox Eradication in China.
At the time, the Peoples Republic of China was not recognized by the United Nations. It was known that one of the very early initiatives of the Mao government was the eradication of smallpox, and it was thought that this occurred in the early 1960s, but WHO needed some verification of this. Since a visit by an International Commission was not acceptable, a compromise arrangement was that Dr Joel Breman, then a medical officer in the Smallpox Eradication Unit in Geneva, and I should visit China for three weeks and get the best information that we could.
1. Arrangements for visit to China by FF and Joel Breman.
2. Report of the visit to China by FF and JB.
3. Reports on the Certification in China, 14 to 30 July, 1979.
4. Supplementary Report by Chinese government after our visit.
5. Supplementary Report on smallpox in Yunnan Province, by Jiang Yu Tu in 1985.
6. Correspondence with Dr Jiang Yu-Tu, mainly on smallpox in China after the last reported case in early 1961 (see Smallpox and its Eradication, pages 1259-1260)

4. Declaration of Smallpox Eradication at the Thirty-Third World Health Assembly, May 1980.
A. Reports from the Director-General of WHO to the Executive Board of WHO; 12 January 1978, 5 and 17 January 1979, 21 December 1979 and 25 January 1980.
B. Resolution and relevant final report of the 1979 Executive board to the World Health Assembly, 8 May 1980.
C. Relevant agenda and verbatim record (in all six UN languages) of Eighth Plenary Meeting, 33rd World Health Assembly, 8 May 1980, containing my speech, as Chairman of the Global Commission, presenting the report to the Chairman of the Assembly. The report and all its recommendations were unanimously supported, and all delegates signed a charter recording this.
D. Strategy for publicizing the achievement of the global eradication of smallpox.
E. Photographs of persons involved in the WHA meeting on 8 May.

5. Articles on the Achievement of Smallpox Eradication
A. Copies of World Health containing many or a few articles on smallpox eradication.
B. Articles about smallpox eradication in scientific and medical journals and in the popular press.

BOX 26

6. Pictorial guide to smallpox diagnosis. Large size Indian and African Smallpox Recognition Cards.

7. Post-Eradication Policy: WHO Committee Meetings.
This Committee, set up in response to a resolution from the 33rd World Health Assembly, was supposed to operate until 1985. After discussions early in 1981, there was a meeting on the implementation of post-smallpox eradication policy, at which I was elected Chairman in early February. It recommended that a Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections be set up, meetings of which were held in Geneva in 1982, 1983, 1984, and a meeting deferred from 1985 was held in March 1986. An ad hoc committee meeting with much the same personnel was held in December 1990; I was Chairman at each of these meetings.
A. Proposals for a Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections.
1. Proposal by I. Arita, Chief of the Smallpox Eradication Unit (SEU), July 1980.
2. Discussions at an Informal Meeting of Poxvirologists, 29-30 January, 1981.
B. Meeting on Implementation of Post-Smallpox Eradication Policy, 3-5 February 1981.
1. List of Recommendations from the World Health Assembly.
2. Agenda, composition of the Committee, and list of Working Papers.
C. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections: First Meeting, 3-5 March 1982.
1. Establishment of Committee and invitation to FF to become a member.
2. List of Participants, Agenda, List of Working Papers.
3. Report of Meeting.
4. Papers published about results of meeting. Bulletin of WHO, 1982, WHO Chronicle, 1982.
D. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections: Second Meeting, 15-17 March 1983.
1. Working papers and fact sheets.
2. Papers on risks of vaccination and progress on cessation of vaccination.
3. Report of meeting.
E. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections: Third Meeting, 28-30 March 1984.
1. Report by FF on destruction of smallpox virus stocks in South Africa after his visit there, 24 September to 5 October 1983. Destruction on 9 December 1983 was confirmed.
2. Correspondence with Arita and Letvinov (Assistant Director-General).
3. Report of meeting.
4. Published papers on monkeypox written as a result of the meeting, Bulletin of WHO, 1984, WHO Chronicle, 1984.
F. Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections. Fourth Meeting, 24-26 March 1986.The 1985 meeting was deferred until March 1986. This was its last meeting.
1. Preliminary agenda, prepared by Arita and sent to FF for comment.
2. Agenda, lists of participants and working papers.
3. Report of meeting.
4. Paper on destruction of smallpox virus stocks by Keith Dumbell and summary of responses of 58 experienced virologists who were consulted.
5. Report to the Director-General, WHO, on the findings of the Fourth meeting.
6. Note in The Times, 4 September 1987, on destruction of smallpox virus stocks.
G. Meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, 10-13
December 1990.
In 1990 serious questions arose about the recommendation of the 1986 meeting of the Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections that all known stocks of smallpox virus should be destroyed. A somewhat larger Committee was convened in December 1990, with instructions to pay particular attention to the destruction of smallpox virus stocks.
1. List of participants and agenda.
2. Inventories of variola virus stocks and intact and cloned variola virus DNA.
3. Report of the meeting.
H. Technical Committee on Analysis of Nucleotide Sequences of Variola Virus Genomes.
Following a recommendation of the 1990 ad hoc Committee meeting, a small Technical Committee on Analysis of Nucleotide Sequences of Variola Virus Genomes was established by WHO and met in CDC Atlanta on 10-11 December 1992 and in Geneva on 27-28 January 1994.
1. Appointment of Technical Committee and terms of reference.
2. Report of Technical Committee, 11-12 December 1992.
3. Report of Technical Committee, 27-28 January 1994.
4. Correspondence with Dr Y. Ghendon, WHO, about a round table discussion on variola virus stocks at the International Congress of Virology in Glasgow, 27-28 August 1993.
5. Letter from the American Type Culture Collection on destruction of variola virus stocks.
I. Meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, 9 September 1994.
Following debate among virologists at the International Congress and in the media about the destruction of variola virus stocks, a further meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections was held in Geneva in September 1994.
1. Correspondence with Dumbell, Henderson and Mahy before the meeting.
2. Agenda, list of participants and background paper by WHO summarizing its activities related to post-smallpox eradication policies.
3. Draft report and correspondence from Fenner and Henderson about suggested alterations.
4. Report of meeting, incorporating our suggestions.
5. WHO press release and articles in The New York Times and The Canberra Times.
J. Report of final meeting of the ad hoc Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, 14 to 15 January 2001. For medical reasons, I was unable to attend this meeting, but I include the Report here.

8. Discussion of Destruction of Variola Virus Stocks
A. 1993-1994, between Virologists.
1. Correspondence between FF and Dr L.S. Sandakhchiev, General Director of NPO ‘Vector’.

2. Transcript of discussions at the International Congress for Virology in Glasgow, in August 1993.
3. Correspondence with Brian Mahy, of CDC Atlanta, about articles arguing for and against the destruction of smallpox virus stocks that appeared in Science, November 1993 and January 1994, with copies of the articles.
4. Correspondence with David Baltimore, following his letter to Science,
7 January 1994.
5. Correspondence with WHO officials (G. Torrigiani and Y. Ghendon) about WHO policy on smallpox virus stocks.
6. Correspondence with five US scientists who wrote to me about WHO policy on smallpox virus stocks.
7. Letter from Mahy and long article that appeared in the New York Times Magazine on WHO policy on smallpox virus stocks, August 21, 1994.
B. Correspondence before the meeting of the World Health Assembly.
With the circulation in late 1995 of the draft agenda of the Executive Board (which, if agreed, becomes the agenda of the Assembly), there was a great deal of discussion between members of the ad hoc Committee, WHO officials and others.
1. Correspondence between D.A. Henderson, I. Arita and FF, January to November 1995.
2. Correspondence between Tony Adams, Australian representative at the Assembly, and FF.
3. Correspondence between FF, Joshua Lederberg and others.
4. Newspaper comments after the meeting of the Executive Board.
C. Discussions before and after the meeting of the World Health Assembly.
1. Agenda item and resolution of the Executive Board meeting in January 1996.
2. Comment from Martinez and Rafe Henderson, of WHO, on the Executive Board resolution.
3. Correspondence with W. Dowdle and D.A. Henderson about writing an open letter to the Director-General of WHO about the Executive Board decision.
4. Correspondence with WHO officials.
A. Letter to Director General, with copies to all members of the Executive Board, signed by 7 of the 10 members of the Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections.
B. Correspondence with Dumbell, Greenaway and Marennikova, who did not sign.
5. Record of the discussion of the World Health Assembly agenda item on variola virus stocks, 25 May 1996, placed on the agenda by Tony Adams. It was decided to defer destruction until 1999. At the 1999 meeting, destruction was deferred until 2002.

9. WHO Advisory Committee on Variola Virus Research.
Following the decision of the Assembly to defer destruction of variola virus stocks, WHO established an Advisory Committee on Variola Virus Research. It comprised 15 members, of whom I was one, and several Advisers, including D.A. Henderson and members of the three organizations carrying out research on variola virus: the Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the American Army Research on Infectious Diseases laboratories and the Russian Vector laboratories in Koltsovo. For medical reasons that precluded long overseas flights, I participated in the first, but no later meetings. However, I include the Reports of all three meetings held up to June 2002 in the files.
A. World Health Assembly meeting, 24 May 1999. Agenda item and briefing notes.
B. First meeting of the Advisory Committee, 6-9 December 1999.
1. Terms of reference, agenda and list of participants.
2. Report of meeting.
3. WHO press release.
4. Useful background papers.
A. The bioterrorism program at NIH, by Tony Fauci.
B. Report of meeting of US experts at CDC, 5 July 1999.
C. Report of discussions at Vector laboratories, Russia, 29 September to 1 October 1999, on research priorities.
D. Paper by D.A. Henderson on a public health perspective.
C. Second meeting of the Advisory Committee, 15-16 February 2001.
D. Third meeting of the Advisory Committee, 3-4 December 2001.

BOX 27

10. Technical Advisory Group on Human Monkeypox.
A. Report of meeting, 11-12 January 1999.
B. Correspondence with WHO about arranging symposium on monkeypox at the International Congress on Virology in Sydney in August 1999.

11. Report by the Institute of Medicine (USA): Assessment of Future Scientific Needs for Live Variola Virus.
In 1997 the Institute of Medicine (IOM) was asked to produce a report on future scientific needs for live variola virus. They were instructed not to consider whether virus stocks should be retained. A committee of nineteen virologists and immunologists, including three poxvirologists, produced the report. Several people with expertise in smallpox, including D.A. Henderson, I. Arita and me, were asked to review the Report.
A. Emails from Henderson (29 October 1998) telling me of the project.
B. Letter from Henderson to IOM, 12 November 1998, and email to me 20 November describing his meeting with the IOM Committee.
C. Request from IOM to me, 14 January 1999, to review completed report and my response.
D. Henderson letter, 12 February, with comments on the way the report was produced and his criticisms of it.
E. Press release of report. Little notice was taken of points of major disagreement raised by Henderson and me.

12. WHO Documents in the WHO/SE, SE and SME Series.
In order to assure the maximum and speedy flow of information between WHO Headquarters in Geneva and workers in the field about progress and problems, the Smallpox Eradication Unit set up a series of documents entitled at various times the WHO/SE, SE and SME series. These were produced in Geneva and covered a wide variety of topics. They were sent to all field and laboratory workers who were involved in the Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme. Some errors in numbering occurred, so the exact sequence of numbers is sometimes incorrect, but the collection in these files is complete (except for one item) and unique in Australia; indeed it is one of the few complete collections in the world. As well as the indexes in the first file, each subsequent file lists the titles on the papers in that file, inside the front cover.
A. Title Index to WHO/SE, SE and SME documents
B. WHO/SE/68.1 to WHO/SE/68.7
C. WHO/SE/69.8 to WHO/SE/69.13
D. WHO/SE/70.14 to WHO/SE/70.23
E. WHO/SE/71.24 to WHO/SE/71.33
F. WHO/SE/72.34 to WHO/SE/72.49
G. WHO/SE/73.50 to WHO/SE/73.61
H. WHO/SE/74.62 to WHO/SE/74.71
I. WHO/SE/75.72 to WHO/SE/75.77
J. WHO/SE/76.78 to WHO/SE/76.88
K. WHO/SE/77.89 to WHO/SE/77.99
L. WHO/SE/78.100 to WHO/SE/78.119

BOX 28
12. WHO Documents in the WHO/SE, SE and SME Series (continued).
M. WHO/SE/78.120 to WHO/SE/78.133
N. WHO/SE/79.134 to WHO/SE/79.144
O. WHO/SE/79.145 to WHO/SE/79.152
P. WHO/SE/80.153 to WHO/SE/80.158, WHO/SE/81.159, WHO/SE/82.160, WHO/SE/83.161, WHO/SE/84.162, WHO/SE/86.163
Q. SE/67.5 Rev. 1 (not available), SE/68.2, SE/68.3, SE/68.7, SE/68.9, SE/69.1, SE/70.1, SE/70.3, SE/71.1 to SE/71.4
R. SE/72.1 to SE/72.10, SE/73.1, SE/73.2, SE/74.1
S. SME/77.1 to SME/77.2, SME/78.1 to SME/78.27, (78.4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12 not issued)
T. SME/79.1 to SME/79.12, (79.4, 5 not issued), SME/80.1 to SME/80.11 (80.10 not issued)

13. Other WHO publications dealing with Smallpox Eradication.
A. WHO Technical Report Series.
1. WHO Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 180 (1959): Requirements for Biological Substances. 5. Requirements for Smallpox Vaccine.
2. WHO Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 283 (1964): WHO Expert Committee on Smallpox. First Report.
3. WHO Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 323 (1966): Requirements for Biological Substances. Revised 1965. Report of a WHO Expert Group.
4. WHO Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 393 (1968): Smallpox Eradication. Report of a WHO Scientific Group.
5. WHO Tech. Rep. Ser. No. 493 (1972). WHO Expert Committee on Smallpox Eradication. Second Report.
6. Guide to the Laboratory Diagnosis of Smallpox for Smallpox Eradication Programmes. World Health Organization, Geneva, 1969. English and French language editions.

BOX 29
13. Other WHO publications dealing with Smallpox Eradication (continued).
B. WHO Weekly Epidemiological Record.
Limited number, mostly those dealing with smallpox and issued after my deeper involvement in certification activities in 1976.

14. Donations to Smallpox Program.
Correspondence about a donation to the Smallpox Programme by the Australian government. In the event, in 1978 Australia donated $A 50,000 ($US 33,625), thus joining the group of 42 countries that donated some $US 62 million in cash to WHO for the Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme.

143/17. Book: Smallpox and its Eradication.
Authorship of this book (Basser Library 5309) occupied most of my time from June 1980 until January 1988. In the files listed under this heading I include the history of the production of the book, its changing ‘Contents’, correspondence about the book with the major co-authors (D.A. Henderson and I. Arita), minutes of meetings of the Editorial Committee, correspondence with the WHO editors (S. Deck and D. Loveday) and with J. Wickett (concerning photographic illustrations and progress on printing), reviews of the book and information on sales.
I started writing as soon as I retired from the Directorship of the Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies in December 1979, at a time when there was no agreement about how the book would be published or whether it would be published at all. Arita, then Chief of the Smallpox Eradication Unit, was very supportive and arranged for WHO to make a grant of $US 22,500 to the John Curtin School of Medical Research (where I was a Visiting Fellow) for travel expenses and secretarial assistance (file 143/17/6). In 1981 I used savings from this grant to purchase a Wang word processor, which was compatible with the system used in Geneva and proved invaluable. By November 1980 I had prepared a draft on clinical features (eventually Chapter 1), and in 1981 substantially revised this (see file 143/17/16) and prepared advanced drafts of the chapters on pathogenesis (Chapter 3), epidemiology (Chapter 4) and virology (Chapter 2) and Arita had prepared a first draft of a chapter on vaccination, which I later modified substantially and split into Chapters 7 and 11.
However, it was clear that it would be essential to persuade D.A. Henderson, Chief of the Unit from 1967-1976, to be the major author of the sections on the field operations over that period. He had a very heavy administrative load, as Dean of the largest School of Public Health in the world, and mistrusted the resolve of WHO to go through with the production of the book (see 143/17/7, letter 26 March 1981). The turning point, for him and for the book, came at the First Meeting of the Editorial Board, on 4 March 1982, when Keith Wynn (in charge of printing), produced three full-sized mock-up books, on different kinds of paper and containing part of the text of my clinical chapter in 15 different type styles.
It was agreed that all line diagrams would be produced in Canberra, under my direction; a task accomplished very skilfully by Kevin Cowan of the ANU Department of Geography. Some time later John Wickett, who had been an administrative officer with the Programme, was appointed to assist with obtaining and preparing plates, obtaining statistical material from WHO files, and keeping authors informed about the progress of production.
Correspondence in the files included here has been weeded of most of the many telexes and trivial letters and because of their volume, omits drafts of chapters that were exchanged between all authors, and especially between Henderson, Arita and myself, and the galley and page proofs which were exchanged between the Geneva-based editors (Deck and especially Loveday) and Henderson and myself, initially by mail and in the latter stages by facsimile. Included in the files are a number of small tapes. Henderson and I used this method of communication extensively to criticize and comment on each other's work - the tapes included here are some of Henderson's comments on my chapters or his responses to my comments on his chapters.
As an example of the way in which interchange occurred and critical comment was sought and provided, I include a detailed history of the first chapter to be substantially completed (‘Clinical Features’, initially Chapter 4 but finally Chapter 1).
Finally, there is an account of the launch of the book, reviews, and correspondence about promotion and sales.

1. The Archiving of WHO Files on Smallpox Eradication.
All WHO HQ files on the Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme have been professionally archived in Geneva, including originals of all plates used in the book and many more photographs. The attached files cover all these and some additional but related matters.
A. Preliminary discussion.
B. Report by Julia Sheppard, archivist from the Wellcome Institute for the History of Medicine.
C. Appointment of Raymond Manning as Consultant Archivist (later Archivist).
D. First progress report by Manning, 1-15 December 1980.
E. Second report by Manning, to 15 April 1981.
F. Example of the method of organizing sections of the Smallpox Archives.
G. Correspondence between FF and the Archivist, February to September 1981.
H. Report of Archivist to the Meeting on the Implementation of Post-Smallpox Eradication Policy, 3-5 February 1981 (see file 143/16/7B).
I. Report of Archivist to the First Meeting of the Committee on Orthopoxvirus Infections, 3-5 March 1982 (see file 143/16/7C).

2. Early Correspondence about Structure and Authorship.
A. Correspondence with Arita (Chief, Smallpox Eradication Unit, 1976-1985), March to July 1978. The last letter (July) contains my early ideas about the book.
B. Correspondence about financial support for my participation as an author.
C. Proposed structure of book.
1. Initial discussion and my proposal as sole author.
2. Second, third and fourth proposals on structure of book.
D. Discussion at WHO Headquarters, Geneva, about publication arrangements.
E. Discussions between Henderson, Arita, Ladnyi and me at the International Congress on Tropical Medicine in Manila, November 1980.
F. Discussions with Henderson and fifth version of the structure of the book.
G. Follow-up correspondence (to previous item).
H. Final Version of structure of book (1986), for comparison with earlier versions.

3. Further Discussions about Authors and Publishers.
A. Decision to include I.D. Ladnyi as an author.
B. Evolving concept of a book with four authors and some 30 ‘contributors’.
C. Progress reports and costings, September and November, 1981.
D. Discussions with Academic Press, Oxford University Press and Johns Hopkins University Press as potential co-publishers with WHO.
E. Final decision that WHO should publish the book.
F. Letter from Arita on arrangement of author’s names on spine of book.

4. Evolving Structure of Book, 1978 to 1986
A. As presented to successive meetings of the Editorial Board.
B. Details of discussions leading to changes in structure.

5. Reports of Meetings of the Editorial Board, 1982-1986.
Late in 1981 WHO established an Editorial Board comprising all authors and all relevant WHO officials. This met eight times between March 1982 and November 1986.
A. First meeting, 4 March 1982.
B. Second meeting, 8 September 1982.
C. Third meeting, 14 March 1983.
D. Fourth meeting, 11 October 1983. Dr Z. Jezek was appointed as an author.
E. Fifth meeting, 30 March 1984.
F. Sixth meeting, 13 December 1984.
G. Seventh meeting, 26 March 1986.
H. Eighth meeting, 7 November 1986.

6. Financial arrangements between WHO and F. Fenner at ANU.
From 1980 to 1987 WHO provided funds to the John Curtin School of Medical Research to provide me with clerical assistance and travel money for work done on the smallpox book. From 1983-87 WHO provided me with an unsolicited honorarium.
A. Correspondence between Fenner and WHO officials, 1978 to 1987.
B. ANU records of financial transactions.

7. Correspondence between FF and D.A. Henderson about the Smallpox Book.
The letters are arranged chronologically from 1980 to 1987, in two files, 1980-83 and 1984-87. The attachments to some letters, which are detailed commentaries on particular chapters, were supplemented by taped conversations and face to face discussions in Geneva and Baltimore, several times each year.

BOX 30
8. Correspondence with I. Arita about the Smallpox Book.
The letters are arranged chronologically from 1980 to 1986, in three files, 1980-81, 1982-83, 1984-86.

9. Correspondence with Z. Jezek about the Smallpox Book.
Zdeno Jezek was Assistant Chief of the Smallpox Eradication Unit; from 1983 he was designated as an author of the book. As well as checking chapters on countries where he had had field experience, he explored the Smallpox Archives for detailed figures on the incidence of reported cases, etc.

10. Correspondence with I.D. Ladnyi about the Smallpox Book.
I.D. Ladnyi was the Assistant-Director General of WHO who was responsible for communicable diseases. In 1980 it was decided that he should be designated an author of the book, partly for political reasons (he was a representative of the USSR) and because of his earlier involvement in field work in Africa.
A. Correspondence with Ladnyi.

11. Clearance of Certain Chapters by Governments of Formerly Endemic Countries.
Because WHO is a bureaucratic Organization, chapters dealing with member countries had to be cleared by their governments, although the authors took responsibility for all that was printed. These letters illustrate some of the delays encountered.
A. Summary of the position in April 1985, by Z. Jezek.
B. Reaction of Indian Government to Chapter 15.
C. Reactions of some other governments.

12. Correspondence with Various Experts (other than Authors) about the Smallpox Book
The principal authors, FF, Henderson and Arita, consulted a wide range of people who had participated in the program or were scientific experts, by letter of personal contact. Relevant letters are filed by surname, arranged alphabetically.
Basu, R.N.
Baxby, D.
Blake, J.B.
Bras, G.
Breman, J.
Gerber, K.
Gispen, R.
Hopkins, D.R.
Joklik, W.K.
Kempe, H.
Kitamura, T.
Lancaster, H.O.
Lundbeck, H.
McCarthy, K.
Marennikova, S.
Matsumoto, K.
Nakano, J.H.
Needham, J.
Payne, L.G.
Rao, A.R.
Richter, K.H.
Tulloch, J.L.
Wehrle, P.F.
Wolstenholme, G.

13. Correspondence with Dominic Loveday about editing the Smallpox Book.
From the time of its first meeting in March 1982, Loveday, who had recently become Head of the Publications Division of WHO, was a member of the Editorial Board. From the time that the clinical chapter was in advanced draft (about mid-1983) he made valuable comments and after his retirement in 1986 replaced Stella Deck as full-time editor. Besides the many editorial improvements he introduced, he made valuable comments by Phillips tapes and on manuscripts and proofs. The correspondence in these files was between FF, Henderson, Arita and Loveday, usually by fax.
A. 1983, 1986 and January, February 1987.
B. March to August 1987.

BOX 31

14. Correspondence with Stella Deck about editing the Smallpox Book.
Stella Deck was a senior WHO editor who on her retirement was employed as an editor for the Smallpox book, from early 1984 until July 1986.
A. Correspondence with FF.
B. Example of a manuscript (Chapter 4, Epidemiology) edited by Deck.

15. Correspondence with John Wickett about the Smallpox Book.
John Wickett, an administrative officer at WHO HQ during the Programme, was taken on in 1984 to supervise the acquisition and preparation of illustrations and to help Henderson with data collection. The file of letters does not properly reflect his contributions; most of my work with him was done on my numerous visits to Geneva. He prepared a definitive table of the numbers of smallpox cases reported to WHO between 1920 and eradication.
A. Correspondence, 1985-86.
B. Table of cases of smallpox notified to WHO, 1920 to 1978.

16. Chapter 1 (initially Chapter 4): The Clinical Features of Smallpox.
I have selected this chapter as an example of the way in which the initial drafts of chapters were subjected to criticism and improvement by co-authors and other experts in the field covered. The first advanced draft (dated 18-3-81) was sent to the co-authors, and to Z. Jezek (then not a co-author), A.R. Rao and J.K. Sarkar (India), A.W. Downie and A.B. Christie (England), and G. Meiklejohn and C.H. Kempe (USA). During October-November 1981 I visited all these people and their comments are included in this file or stapled in the bound draft chapter. The most detailed comments were from AR. Rao, with whom I spent three days in Madras in further discussions; his comments and my responses are in handwriting in the appropriate pages of the draft.
A second draft was prepared and circulated in January 1982, a third in April-September 1983; both were scrutinized by all co-authors. The final draft was prepared in December 1983 and sent to Stella Deck, at WHO Headquarters to edit.
A. First draft, with many comments, especially from A.R. Rao, stapled in place.
B. Letters commenting on this draft from co-authors Arita and Henderson, Z. Jezek (not then a co-author), A.B. Christie and G. Meiklejohn.
C. Tapes from Loveday and Henderson, with comments on the third draft of Chapter 1.
D. Editorial changes to December 1983 manuscript (final draft) suggested by S. Deck.
E. First galley proofs of text, June 1985, with editorial changes by S. Deck.

17. Censorship by I.D. Ladnyi; a vetoed ‘box’.

18. Launch of Smallpox and its Eradication, 18 January 1988.
The book was launched during a meeting of the Executive Board of WHO in January 1988. A full afternoon was given to the launch, and in the evening all those intimately concerned with production of the book had dinner at a village restaurant and were presented with leather-bound copies, which were signed by all at the dinner.
A. Schedule and arrangements for the launch.
1. Time table.
2. Speech by Chairman of Executive Board, Dr A. Grech.
3. Speech by senior author, F. Fenner.
4. Speech by Director-General of WHO, Dr H. Mahler.
B. Promotional material used by WHO at the time of the launch.
C. Photographs.
1. The ‘top table’; Chair of Executive Board, Fenner, Henderson, Arita, Director-General of WHO, Jezek.
2. Dr Jezek signing a copy of the book for Dr Mahler.
3. The authors, production manager (Keith Wynn) and editor (Stella Deck).
D. Personal letter from Dr Mahler to FF.
E. Dinner after the Launch. Letter by FF, recalling the evening after the launch, when WHO personnel closely involved in the eradication program and the production of the book dined and wined and collected a leather-bound copy of the book, which all signed. This letter was written when I presented my copy to the ‘rare books’ collection of the ANU.

19. Promotion and Sales.
A. Promotional material used by WHO.
B. Correspondence with Mary Kindhauser, Distribution and Sales, WHO Headquarters, 1988 and 1989.

20. Reviews of Smallpox and its Eradication.
A. Suggestions from Donald Hopkins about suitable journals for reviews, 1986.
B. Suggestions from FF for possible newspaper reviews in Australia.
C. Some reviews.
D. Congratulatory letters to FF

BOX 32
21. Selected Reprints of Papers used in Writing Smallpox and its Eradication,
During the preparation of Smallpox and its Eradication, a large number of reprints were gathered. Files here included only reprints of articles that were difficult to locate in medical libraries or are of particular interest, e.g., reprints of articles on the history of smallpox and vaccination, on the ‘whitepox’ viruses, and on monkeypox. In each file reprints are arranged alphabetically, by first author.
A. Reprints relating to the History of Smallpox.
1. General.
2. Africa.
3. Americas.
4. Asia (Arabia, Indonesia).
5. Australia, New Guinea.

BOX 33

6. China.
7. Europe.
8. India.
9. Japan.
10. Letters about the history of smallpox, arranged alphabetically: Basham (India), Cliff (Iceland), Curtin (Africa), Dendon (Africa), de Quadros (Americas), Durosoir (Pacific islands), Gandevia (Australia), McNeill (Americas), Needham (China), Nicholas (India), several authors (Ramses V).
B. Reprints relating to the Clinical Features of Smallpox.
1. Clinical Features.
2. Chemotherapy.

BOX 34

C. Reprints relating to the Epidemiology of Smallpox.
D. Reprints relating to the Pathology and Pathogenesis of Smallpox.
1. Pathology.
2. Pathogenesis.
3. Immunology.
4. Slides of sections of smallpox pustules and associated case records and post-mortem details, provided by the US Armed Forces Institute of Pathology.
E. Reprints relating to Variolation.

BOX 35

F. Reprints relating to Vaccinia Virus and Vaccination.
1. Historical.
A. General
B. Jenner 2. General.
3. Pathology of Vaccinia and Complications.
4. Vaccinia Virus, Strains and History.

BOX 36

G. Reprints relating to Cowpox Virus.
H. Reprints relating to Variola Virus.
1. General.
2. Variola Virus in Monkeys.
I. Reprints and other material relating to ‘Whitepox’ Viruses.
Understanding and explaining the significance of the recovery by a scientist in Holland (Kapsenberg) and Moscow scientists (Marennikova and her group) of viruses indistinguishable from variola virus from wild animals of various species in Africa and from their laboratory cultures of monkeypox virus was my most important scientific contribution to the smallpox eradication program. I always believed, and it is now accepted, that they were contaminants; if they had not been smallpox eradication would have been impossible. But demonstrating this and having it accepted was diplomatically difficult, because Marennikova's laboratory was one of the two WHO Collaborating Centres in which all diagnostic work for the Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme was carried out.
1. ‘Whitepox’ Viruses.
2. Discussion of the significance of ‘whitepox’ viruses, mainly by Fenner.
A. Letter (1972) from D.A. Henderson, alerting poxvirologists to the problem.
B. Correspondence relating to the Dutch (Kapsenberg) findings in 1964.
C. Papers on Marennikova’s results, 1978.
D. Letters from Marennikova, justifying her conclusions.
E. Statement by Marennikova and Shelukhina on their interpretation of ‘whitepox’ viruses.
F. Results of discussion about ‘whitepox’ viruses, Geneva, November 1978.
G. Assignment report by E.M. Shelukhina on her work at CDC, Atlanta, 1979.
H. My notes and correspondence with Nakano, 1978.
I. Further notes by FF on a meeting of poxvirus experts, 1979.
J. Correspondence about ‘whitepox’ viruses; Esposito, Arita, FF, Shelukhina.
K. Paper produced by WHO in 1980 by Fenner, Dumbell, Marennikova and Nakano, which we sought to publish in Nature. The journal refused it, but later used the information in it in a report of the announcement of global eradication on 8 May 1980 (in file 143/16/5B).
3. Reprints and other material relating to laboratory contamination.

BOX 37

J. Reprints and other materials relating to Monkeypox.
1. Monkeypox Virus.
2. Ecology of monkeypox.
3. Human Monkeypox.

K 1, 2. Reprints relating to the Eradication of Smallpox.
3. Conference and publications about a ‘dig’ in a church yard in London, 1985.
L. Correspondence with Jiang Yu Tu about eradication of smallpox in China.

143/18. Activities undertaken for the Australian Academy of Science.
From 1958 to 1961 I was Secretary (Biological Sciences) of the Australian Academy of Science. During this period, and subsequently, I was involved in a range of activities associated with various committees set up by the Academy (see file 143/1, pages 2-3). The essential results of these are summarized in The Australian Academy of Science. The First Forty Years (see file 143/14/6M). Two of them warrant further archival mention: the Report of the Committee on Fauna and Flora and the Report of the Committee on Recombinant DNA, for the first of which I acted as Chairman at one stage and the second throughout its deliberations.

1. Committee on Fauna and Flora.
In 1961 this Committee, of which, as Secretary, Biological Sciences, I was a member, recommended the establishment of a Research School of Biological Sciences in the Institute of Advanced Studies of the ANU and of a Museum of Australian Biology and a National Biological Survey. Beyond passing the first recommendation to the Vice-Chancellor of the ANU in July 1961, the Academy played no further role in the former proposal, although on behalf of the Vice-Chancellor I visited Professor Catcheside (who later became the first Director of RSBS) and discussed the idea at length with him when I was an Overseas Fellow at Cambridge University in 1961-62. The second concept, a Biological Survey of Australia, took much longer to materialize.
A. Recommendation to the Vice-Chancellor of the ANU, July 1961. RSBS was accepted in principle in 1962.
B. January 1962, report of the Committee on Fauna and Flora and recommendation to the Prime Minister by the President of the Academy, Professor T.M. Cherry for a Museum of Australian Biology and National Biological Survey, and a new Flora of Australia. Finally, in April 1965, the Prime Minister wrote to the President of the Academy to the effect that ‘Government Finance ... cannot be provided at present.’
C. Revival of Fauna and Flora Committee in 1967 by unofficial letter I wrote to Ennor as Secretary of the Department of Education and Science (22-6-67). First draft of revised Submission by Fauna and Flora Committee (10-11-67). Because of Professor White’s absence overseas for several months in 1968, I was appointed Chairman of the Committee.
D. Botanical and Zoological subcommittees were established, visits made to all Australian museums by the latter (of which I was a member) and a new draft report widely circulated to all interested biologists in Australia.
1. Report of Zoological Subcommittee on visits to museums.
2. Final Report of the Fauna and Flora Committee, published in the Australian Journal of Science, June 1969.
3. Letter of Burnet, as President, to Malcolm Fraser as Minister for Education and Science, with Report and ‘Questions and Answers’.
4. Press reports from Fraser, 7 March1969.
5. Follow-up letter from D.F. Martyn as President to Fraser, and reply.
E. Third attempt, 1972.
1. FF correspondence within Academy, April to August 1972.
2. Transcript of evidence given to House of Representatives Select Committee on Wildlife Conservation, August 1972.
3. Press release on FF’s presentation to the Select Committee.
F. Realization.
1. Letters to newly elected Labor ministers. The Minister for Science announced the establishment of the Australian Biological Resources Study in August 1973.
2. Letter to Mr Ralph Hunt, member of newly elected Conservative government, to ensure the need to continue support for the Australian Biological Resources Study.

2. Video-Archive Project
In 1992 the Royal Australasian College of Physicians became involved in a video-archive project initiated several years earlier by the Royal College of Physicians of London, by which videos were prepared depicting selected Fellows of the College. In March 1992 Dr Brian Gandevia, the Honorary Librarian of the Australasian College, contacted me to say that Dr Max Blythe, the man who had carried out the interviews for the London College, was coming to Sydney and he wanted me (as a Fellow of both Colleges) to come down to Sydney for an interview. Following this, a small committee was set up by the Council of the Academy, of which I was Chairman. I suggested that it would be a good idea if the Academy arranged for Blythe to come to Canberra to interview Fellows whenever he came out to Australia. This occurred on several occasions. Subsequently a number of Fellows acted as interviewers and local firms undertook the recordings. In 2001 Council of the Academy resolved, over time, to make such recordings of all Fellows.
A. Article describing the video-archive of the Royal College of Physicians of London, published in 1992.
B. Correspondence of FF with Gandevia and Blythe, 1992.
C. Correspondence with Blythe to arrange visit in 1993.
D. Report by FF to AGM of Australian Academy of Science, April 1994.
E. Minutes of Academy’s Video-History Committee, 20 November 1995, and response from Blythe.
F. Minutes of meetings of Academy Video-History Committee, 15 February and 26 March 1996.
G. Correspondence with Blythe, 1996 and 1997, including with 1997 letter, all video interviews up to that time. Eighteen of these were Fellows or Foreign Members of the AAS.

143/19. Dealings with Florey and Florey Centenary Papers

1. Correspondence with H.W. Florey, 1948-1961.
I was appointed to the JCSMR in 1948, and from then until well after his retirement from the position of Advisor to the School I corresponded with Florey. The letters are arranged chronologically, by year and within years.
A. 1948-49, letters relating to my appointment to JCSMR.
B. Correspondence with Florey, 1950 and 1951 (mostly 1951).
C. Correspondence with Florey, 1952.
D. Correspondence with Florey, 1953.
E. Correspondence with Florey, 1954.
F. Correspondence with Florey, 1955.
G. Correspondence with Florey, 1959, 1960, 1961.

2. Raising Money for the Florey Fund.
Because of my contacts with Florey in the early days of establishing the John Curtin School of Medical Research, and because I was Director of the School at the time of his death in 1968, I became involved in a number of activities relating to his memory. The first of these was an effort to raise money to endow a Florey Fellowship and a later a Florey Lecture. Both were established by the Australian National University, of which Florey had been Chancellor, in collaboration with the Royal Society of London, of which Florey had been President. I was asked to give the second Florey Lecture (the first in the United Kingdom). The Australian National University files contain full information on both the fellowships and the lectures.
A 1. Extracts from Annual Reports of the John Curtin School of Medical Research.
2. Circular for raising money.
B. Transcript of broadcast by FF for ABC and BBC, 12 December 1968.
C. Letter from Executive Secretary of the Royal Society, indicating money raised.

3. Obituary Notice and Biographies of Florey.
Long and detailed biographies of Florey have been written by E.P. Abraham (Royal Society biographical memoir), L.E. Bickel, G. Macfarlane, and T.I. Williams (books). I was asked to write several short biographies of Florey, for Scribners Dictionary of Scientific Biography, for the Roll of the Royal Australasian College of Physicians and for the Australian Dictionary of Biography.
A. Obituary for the Australian Journal of Science.
B. Biography for Scribner's Dictionary of Scientific Biography.
1. Correspondence with editorial staff of Scribner’s.
2. Background data on Scribner's Dictionary of Scientific Biography.
3. Correspondence with Joan Gardner (microbiologist at University of Melbourne who was a niece of Florey).
4. Correspondence with the Registrar of the University of Adelaide.
5. Correspondence with the Headmaster of St Peter's College.
6. Manuscript of Biography, as sent to Scribner’s.
C. Biography of Florey for Roll of the Royal Australasian College of Physicians.
1. Correspondence with editor of Roll, G.L. McDonald.
2. Manuscript and photo, printed version, with original photograph.
D. Biography of Florey for Australian Dictionary of Biography.
1. Request, with constraints.
2. Manuscript as submitted.

4. Florey Stone, Westminster Abbey.
This concept was due to Dr Cecil J. Hackett, an Australian, born and educated in Adelaide, who had served for several years with the World Health Organization and then as Director of the Wellcome Museum of Medical Science in London, and had retired in London. I was acquainted with him because he taught me physiology in third year medicine and had done the anatomical measurements on trips of the University of Adelaide/South Australian Museum anthropological expeditions into Central Australia, a job I took on from 1934-1938. The stimulus for the stone was an observation by Lady Fairley, the widow of Sir Neil Hamilton Fairley and a close friend of the Hacketts. Fairley’s son, Professor Gordon Fairley, had been murdered accidentally by an IRA car bomb designed for an English politician, just before he was about to leave England to take up a senior position in cancer research in Australia. A commemorative plaque to Gordon Fairley had been erected on the wall the crypt of St Paul's Cathedral. On a visit to see the plaque, Lady Fairley noticed that there was a similar plaque for Sir Alexander Fleming, just below that of Gordon Fairley, but nothing there (or in Westminster Abbey, where Mrs Hackett was a voluntary helper of many years standing) commemorating Florey. Cecil Hackett took it upon himself to get something done, and obtained support from the Royal Society and the South Australian government (both Hackett and Florey were born and educated in South Australia), and obtained agreement from the Dean of Westminster Abbey for the placement of a commemorative stone adjacent to that of Herschel and Charles Darwin. Because I was an Australian, a Fellow of the Royal Society, had worked with Florey on the establishment of the John Curtin School and was a close friend of the Hacketts, I was asked to give the Address at the ceremony on All Souls Day, 1982, when the Florey Stone was unveiled by Lady Florey. Subsequently, I signed the register of those who had given ‘sermons’ at Westminster Abbey, something that I had never expected! On the anniversary of Florey's birthday, the Hacketts have arranged for flowers to be placed on the stone, as illustrated in one of the photographs.
A. Minutes of meeting of the Special Services Committee of Westminster Abbey to discuss arrangements.
B. Details of donors and covering letter from Dr C.J. Hackett
C. Programme of service, reprint of my address, Dean's Newsletter.
D. Follow-up. Most files concerning Florey Stone sent to Florey Archives at Royal Society. Poem to Cecil and Beattie Hackett written by the then chaplain, Charles Taylor. Note in Adelaide University Graduates Union Gazette, December 1981.
E. Photographs of Florey Stone, alone, with flowers, and with Cecil Hackett and Agent-General for South Australia.
F. Comment on Florey Stone and Florey Fellowships and Lectures in book by T.I. Williams, Howard Florey: Penicillin and After, Oxford University Press, 1984.

5. Florey Centenary Celebrations.
In 1996 Dr John Best persuaded the Minister for Health, Dr Wooldridge, to set up and finance a committee to celebrate the centenary of Florey's birth. The event was celebrated in Australia and England. I was asked to be a member of the Florey Centenary National Committee. These files focus on activities in which I was actively involved.

A. Background.
1. Establishment of an ad hoc committee and its report to Dr Wooldridge in October 1996.
2. Florey Centenary National Committee.
3. Composition of National, Melbourne, Canberra and Adelaide Committees, Florey Medal Committee and Education Committee.
4. Program of Events in Australia.

B. Celebrations in Canberra.
1. Program for celebrations in Australia.
2. Presentation of awards to Science teachers, at Florey Primary School, by FF. Details, newspaper article and photo.
3. Symposium on Helicobacter pylori arranged by JCSMR committee.
A. Program with abstracts.
B. Draft of opening address given by FF.
4. Article of Florey in JCSMR Curtinraiser, October 1998.
5. Program of Portrait of Howard Florey, arranged by National Portrait Gallery in Old Parliament House. Text in the program written by FF.
6. Howard Florey Centenary Symposium on Infectious Diseases in Humans, organized by the Nature and Society Forum.
A. Proceedings of the Symposium.
B. Comments in RACP Fellowship Affairs and the ANU Reporter.

C. Howard Florey number of Microbiology Australia, July 1998, editorial and article by FF.
D. Florey Centenary Celebrations, United Kingdom, 1998.
1. Program of activities in Oxford and London. I attended all activities except the service at Westminster Abbey, which coincided with the Florey dinner in Adelaide, at which the first Faulding-Florey award was made.
2. Menu of dinner with Norman Heatley and photo of Heatley and FF, plus article in the Medical Journal of Australia, by Heatley.
3. Address at service at Westminster Abbey, 24 September 1998, by Sir Robert May.
4. Address by FF at reception at the Royal Society, 2 October 1998.

143/20. Dealings with Burnet and Burnet Centenary Celebrations.
1. Correspondence with F.M. Burnet, arranged by year, 1953 to 1968, and chronologically within years.
2. Correspondence relating to my nomination of Burnet for the Nobel Prize in 1957.
3. Correspondence relating to the Burnet 70th Birthday Symposium, in Melbourne on 15 September 1969. The full texts of all lectures were published in a special edition of Australasian Annals of Medicine (1969) 18 (4), 293-368.
4. Biographies of Burnet.
Burnet died on 31 August 1985. I was asked to prepare a Biographical Memoir of Burnet for The Royal Society, the Australian Academy of Science and a short biography for the American Philosophical Society. I prepared the two larger biographical memoirs concurrently, and they are similar in many respects. These files contain letters concerning arrangements for writing these biographies, letters written during the writing and comments subsequently, correspondence with Chris Sexton, who wrote a book-length biography of Burnet and other material.
A. Requests to write the biographical memoirs or notices.
1. The Royal Society of London.
2. The Australian Academy of Science.
3. The American Philosophical Society.

BOX 39

B. Correspondence with Burnet's children about biographies.
1. With Elizabeth Dexter, F.M. Burnet's oldest child.
2. With Ian Burnet, F.M. Burnet's only son.
C. Correspondence relating to information for biographies.
1. Comments on the draft Biographical Memoir from individual scientists and others: M. Alpers, C.H. Andrewes, W.I.B. Beveridge, J. Deeble, Joyce Fazekas, Earle Hackett, Arthur Hughes, H.O. Lancaster, J. Lederberg, I.R. Mackay, J. Medawar, D. Metcalf, G.J.V. Nossal, M. Sabine, E.G. Saint, C. Sexton, D.O. White.
2. From organizations about various awards: Australasian Society for Infectious Diseases, Institut Armand-Frappier, Monnaie de Paris.

5. Burnet Centenary Celebrations.
John Best followed up on the Florey Centenary Celebrations with a similar program to celebrate the Burnet Centenary in 1999, using the much same committee, of which I was a member. As for the files on the Florey Centenary Celebrations, these files focus on activities in which I was actively involved,
A. Establishment and composition of the Burnet Centenary Committee.
B. Burnet Centenary number of Microbiology Australia, July 1999. I was the editor of this number and wrote the article ‘Burnet the virologist: 1925-40’.
C 1. Macfarlane Burnet Centenary Symposium on Immunology and Virology, held in Melbourne, 4-5 August, 1999.
2. My paper on the biological control of rabbits and Burnet’s interest in this.
D 1. National Portrait Gallery exhibit featuring Burnet, Jean Macnamara, and Ian Clunies Ross, all of whom were born in 1899. I helped organize this and wrote the section of the pamphlet on Burnet.
2. Draft of section on Burnet.
E. Burnet Centenary Symposium: Q Fever, 12-14 October 1999.
1. I helped organize this, gave the Derrick-Mackerras Memorial Lecture the night before the symposium, and gave a short paper at the symposium.
2. Program of Symposium.
F. Short article produced for the 1998-99 Macfarlane Burnet Centenary number of the Annual Report of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute.

143/21. Selected Personal Correspondence (not listed elsewhere).
To conserve space in the filing cabinet I periodically threw out the great majority of my correspondence. However, I kept most of my correspondence with some scientists; if not filed elsewhere (see Burnet; 143/6/1 and 143/20/1; Dubos, 143/7/2; Florey, 143/8/1 and 143/19/1) this is collated here.
1. D. Baxby. Baxby trained with AW Downie (see 143/21/3) at the University of Liverpool and became the foremost scholar in the world relative to the understanding of cowpox and the history of vaccination. The correspondence is arranged chronologically by years and within each year.
A. 1990 to 1996.
B. 1997 to 2002.
2. W.R. Crocker. I met and became friendly with Crocker when he was Professor of International Relations in the Research School of Pacific Studies of ANU (1949-52) and he built his home opposite ours in Torres Street, Red Hill. When Ambassador to Indonesia he arranged my trip there to investigate the location of a medical school (see file 143/8/5E1); later he asked me to report on virology in India (a visit all over India, lasting six weeks in 1960-61; see file 143/8/5E2). I kept up a desultory correspondence after he retired in about 1968, but often visited him when I went to Adelaide.
A. 1955 to 1957; trip to Indonesia.
B. 1960-61; trip to India.
C. 1966 to 1967.
D. After his retirement, 1970 to 2002.
E. Obituary notices and correspondence with his son, after his death on14-11-02.
3. A.W. Downie. Alan Downie, Professor of Bacteriology at the University of Liverpool, was the leading expert on poxviruses in the United Kingdom. I visited him on my first trip to England in 1949 and on all possible subsequent trips, always staying at his house when in Liverpool, and he stayed with us when he visited Australia.
A. 1951 to 1956.
B. 1957 to 1961.
C. 1979 to 1982, mostly about the Smallpox book.
4. K.R. Dumbell. Keith Dumbell, whom I first met as a PhD student with Allan Downie in 1949, was the foremost authority on variola virus at the time of the Intensified Smallpox Eradication Programme. He became Professor of Virology at St Mary’s Hospital Medical School and later moved to South Africa, becoming Professor of Bacteriology at the University of Capetown. He was a co-author of The Orthopoxviruses and helped me with the Smallpox book; most of the letters associated with this work are not available now. Letters in this file date from 1977 to 1996 and are arranged chronologically; later we communicated by email and did not keep copies.
5. D.C. Gajdusek, 1965-1976. I was active on the medical research scene in Papua New Guinea for many years and was very interested in the story of kuru and other aspects of Gajdusek's extraordinary life. We still correspond occasionally, but I have not kept the letters. Those available refer largely to two periods when Carleton was in difficulties with local authorities.
A. 1965-66. Carleton was having difficulties with the authorities in Papua New Guinea about his movements in the country. I wrote to him in my capacity as a member of the Papua New Guinea Medical Research Committee.
B. 1996-97. At this time he was being persecuted in the United States, as an alleged paedophile.
6. Z. Jezek, 1998-99, 1992, 1995. Jezek and I were good friends and collaborated in the Smallpox book and a book on monkeypox (see file 143/14/6J).

BOX 40

143/22. Marks of recognition other than prizes or medals (see also 143/14/2).
Papers relating to several of the items listed below are filed elsewhere, as indicated
1. Honorary Degrees. I was awarded my first honorary degree, MD, Monash University, in 1964 (see file 143/8/5C5). Since my retirement in 1979 I have received honorary degrees from the University of Liege, in 1992 (see file 143/14/2I), Oxford Brookes University, in 1995 (see file 143/14/2K2) and The Australian National University, in 1996 (see file 143/14/2I).

2. Conference: Viral Diseases in South-East Asia and the Western Pacific.
A former PhD student, then Associate-Professor of Microbiology in the University of Western Australia, John Mackenzie, organized an International Conference ‘Viral Diseases in South-East Asia and the Western Pacific,’ held in Canberra 8-12 February 1982 and dedicated to FF. The Proceedings were published as a book of the same title, by Academic Press, Sydney. I was presented with a leather-bound copy, signed by most of the contributors; this is housed in the Basser Library bookshelves.
A. Advertisement, Program and Abstracts.
B. Report in The Canberra Times, with original of the photograph of FF Xerox of front page of book and ‘Opening Remarks’ by F. M. Burnet.
C. Keynote address, by FF, and Review and Suggestions, following final session of the conference, compiled by FF
D. Correspondence with John Mackenzie.
E. Correspondence following conference.

3. Frank Fenner Visiting Fellowship at the Australian Animal Health Laboratory (AAHL), initiated in 1986.

4. Frank Fenner Research Award and Fenner Lecture of the Australian Society for Microbiology. This was set up by the Council of the ASM in 1990, the first recipient being Paul Manning. It has continued as an annual award; only a few additional details are included here.

5. Fenner Hall.
Early in 1992 the University Council purchased Gowrie Hostel, a large government hostel on Northbourne Avenue, for additional student accommodation. In March 1992 Council named the new Hall of Residence ‘Fenner Hall.’ A portrait of FF painted by Mrs Vicki Dabro hangs in the Frank Fenner Room, photographs of Bobbie Fenner hang in the Bobbie Fenner Reading Room. The Fenner coat of arms and the ANU coat of arms are displayed on Fenner Hall writing material, etc.
A. Articles in The Canberra Times, Curtinraiser, and the ANU Staff News.
B. Fenner Hall College Handbook, 1994.

6. Honorary Membership of Australian Veterinary Association, 1993.

7. Frank Fenner display, John Curtin School of Medical Research. A display of items of importance in the scientific life of FF, including video presentations, was prepared in time for the Sixth Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conference, which also served as 80th birthday celebrations for FF (see file 143/23/4H). It is located in the room below the entrance to the JCSMR building, and was opened on 28 November 1994 by Ms Rosemary Follett, Chief Minister of the ACT.
A. Photographs taken at the time of the opening of the display.
B. Photographs of the display.

8. Frank Fenner Medal, John Curtin School of Medical Research. In 1994 ANU Council approved the annual award of a Frank Fenner Medal to the PhD student producing the most outstanding thesis. Photos of medal and of 1996, 1997, 2000 awards.

9. Fenner Merit Scholarships, JCSMR; inaugurated in 1996.

10. Portrait of FF by Mathew Lynn. The portrait was commissioned by Stephen Redman, when he was Director, February to August 1999. (see file 143/14/4CC for further details).

11. Life Member of the ANU Endowment for Excellence.
A. Letters from Vice-Chancellors Terrell and Chubb about my donations to ANU and arrangements for support from the ANU Endowment for Excellence.
B. Photograph of the presentation of silver tray by the President of the Board of the ANU Endowment for Excellence. The tray is inscribed ‘The Australian National University has pleasure in admitting Frank Fenner as a Life member of the ANU Endowment for Excellence in recognition and grateful appreciation of the generous support of the University and in particular for establishing The Frank and Bobbie Fenner Fund.’

143/23. Donations, primarily for Scientific Conferences
In addition to minor donations to various charities, and a donation of $1,000 to the National Gallery of Australia in 1983 (as a Founding Donor), I have made substantial donations to the Australian Academy of Science, the Australian National University and an NGO, the Nature and Society Forum, and a smaller continuing donation to the Australian Society for Microbiology. In 1984, five years after my retirement, my wife and I considered our financial situation and what we needed for our own and our daughter's and grandchildren's futures, and decided to make annual donations to support the two scientific interests that had been central to my life; medical research and concern for the environment.
Stimulated by the example of Sir Frederick and Lady White, who had made substantial donations to establish an endowment fund, the income from which could be used to sponsor Academy conferences, we agreed that such conferences were the most cost-effective way of using relatively small amounts of money. From 1984 onwards we therefore made annual donations to the Australian Academy of Science, to support conferences on current environmental and conservation problems in Australia, and to the Australian National University, to build up endowment funds the income from which could be used to support annual conferences on aspects of medical research of interest to The John Curtin School of Medical Research. Initially (1984) the annual donations were small ($5,000), but in 1986 we increased them substantially (to between $15,000 to $30,000 a year),

1. Australian Academy of Science Environment Fund.
A. Initial arrangements, 1970-1983. Beginning in 1970 and continuing annually until 1983, I donated some of the royalties received from published books, particularly Medical Virology, to the Australian Academy of Science, to set up an Environment Fund, the proceeds of which were to be available to be used for various Academy initiatives relating to the environment, often proposed by the Standing Committee (later National Committee) for the Environment. My donations to this fund totalled $19,050 (no file).
B. Fenner Conferences on the Environment.
1 A. Initiation of the Project.
In 1984 the annual funding was increased with the idea of providing for annual conferences on environmental issues. By 1987 the Academy decided that sufficient funds were available to start the conferences and an advertisement was circulated for the first meeting, in 1988. With increasing donations, in 1997 the Environment Fund reached $250,000. This was judged by Council to be enough, given the success of the Conferences in attracting sponsorship, to maintain them indefinitely at a rate of one Conference annually.
Because the funding for conferences on medical research in the John Curtin School were initiated at the same time, there were discussions with Bob Porter, Director of JCSMR, and Ralph Slatyer, Chairman of the Environment Conference Committee, about the naming of the two conferences, resulting in the names used here (Fenner Conferences on the Environment) and below (Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conferences on Medical Research).
1 B. Correspondence, Standing Order, Committee and first advertisement, in 1987.
2. Titles and publication details of Fenner Conferences on the Environment, 1988 to 2002.
3 A. First Conference, 13-15 September 1988. Program and my Opening Address.
B. First Conference, Comments and letters.
4. Details of Conferences that were not published.
A. Second Conference, 1989, ‘Chemicals in Agriculture’.
B. Fourth Conference, September 1990, ‘Ultraviolet-B Radiation Impacts’.
C. Conference on ‘The Constitution and the Environment’, held at the
University of Melbourne, at which ‘sponsorship by the ‘Fenner Trust’ is acknowledged.
5. Correspondence about Conferences, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994.

2. Australian Academy of Science, Fenner Medal for Research in Biology, excluding the Biomedical Sciences.
I was executor of the will of Alfred Gottschalk, and at his request arranged for $35,000 to be donated to the Australian Academy of Science as an endowment to support the award of a medal to a young scientist, who was not a Fellow, for distinguished research in medical or biological science. I saw the need for another similar award. Given Gottschalk’s background in biomedical research, and my broad interests in the conservation of biological diversity as well as preventive medicine, I decided, after consultation with the Academy Council, to set up a fund for a medal in biological science, the Gottschalk medal being awarded for biomedical research. Having donated enough to cease further support for the Environment Fund (see file 143/24/1B above), I started in 1997 to make donations for a medal in biological sciences, which Council, following precedent, named the Fenner Medal. The first award was made in 2000; the endowment reached the required total of $100,000 in 2001.
A. Standing Order (from AAS Yearbook1999-2000).
B. Photograph of the Medal.
C. First advertisement.
D. Letter from 2001 winner, Barry Pogson.
E. News reports of 2002 winner, Sandra Orgeig.

3. Australian Academy of Science, Basser Library.
I had always been interested in the history of science, and hence in the Basser Library, and in 1996 and 1997 I donated $10,000 to the Academy for use by the Basser Library, initially for cataloging and to support the Video History Project (see file 143/18/2). In 2000 I made a donation of $20,000 to the Library Fund, the bulk of which was used to put in place a series of cupboards for housing archive boxes, at the rear of the top floor of the Shine Dome.

4. Australian National University, Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conferences on Medical Research.
In 1984, at the same time as we initiated large annual donations to the Academy of Science, Bobbie and I commenced making annual donations to support conferences on medical research within the John Curtin School of Medical Research. After discussions between the Chairman of the Academy Environment Committee, Ralph Slatyer, and the Director of JCSMR, Robert Porter, it was agreed that the Academy conferences would be called Fenner Conferences on the Environment and the JCSMR conferences the Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conferences on Medical Research. By 2001 the donations totalled $350,000 and the University’s Endowment for Excellence Fund agreed to match further donations to a total of $75,000, so that the conferences could draw on the income from $500,000 as basic funding for future conferences. A sum of $20,000 was placed in the Endowment for Excellence Fund for this purpose in 2002.
Between 1988 and 2002 ten conferences were held, the 1988 conference honouring Gordon Ada, who had just retired as Professor of Microbiology, the 1994 conference honouring FF on the occasion of his 80th birthday and the 2002 conference honouring Gordon Ada, still active at 80 years of age.
The following conferences were held between 1988 and 2002:
First, 26-28 October 1988, Immunology of Virus Diseases, organized by Division of Virology and Cellular Pathology.
Second, 25-27 October 1989, The Molecular Genetics of Human Cell Receptors, organized by the Human Genetics Group of the Division of Clinical Sciences.
Third, 27-28 September 1990, Synaptic Transmission, organized by the Division of Neuroscience.
Fourth, 6-8 November 1991, Genetic Variation and Selection in Microbiology and Immunology, organized by the Division of Cell Biology.
Fifth, 23-25 September 1992, Molecular Phylogeny and Human Evolution, organized by the Human and Molecular Genetics Groups of the Division of Clinical Sciences.
Sixth, 28-30 November 1994, Viruses, Vaccines and Vectors, organized by the Division of Cell Biology.
Seventh, 27-28 September 1996, Molecular Mechanisms in Cancer, organized by the Division of Molecular Medicine.
Eighth, 20-22 May 1998, Cellular Communication in Health and Disease, organized by the Divisions of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, Neuroscience and Molecular Medicine.
Ninth, 29-30 September 2001, Bioinformation Science, organized by Human Genetics Group, Division of Molecular Medicine.
Tenth, 20-22 October 2002, Vaccines and Vaccination in the Twentyfirst Century, organized by the Division of Immunology and Genetics.
A. Letter to the Vice-Chancellor, ANU, setting out the proposal. In the event, in 1987 the then Director, Robert Porter, and I decided that the best way to use the money was to run annual conferences on aspects of medical research of interest to the School (letter 27 February 1987).
B. Summaries of first six conferences, from Annual Reports of JCSMR. Due to a change in the arrangements for Annual Reports, later conferences were not mentioned in them.
C. First conference, 1988.
1. Advertisement, program and news comments.
2. My opening address at the first conference, which includes a description by Peter Doherty of the discovery of HLA restriction.
3. Proceedings published as a book, edited by R.V. Blanden.
D. 1. Program and my introductory address to the second conference, 1989.
2. Comments from participants in the second conference.
E. Report and comment on the third conference, 1990.
F. Fourth conference, 1991.
1. Advertisement and program.
2. Proceedings published in the journal Immunology and Cell Biology, 1992, vol. 70, parts 1, 2, 3.
3. Photograph of the speakers, in front of JCSMR.
G. Comment on the fifth conference, 1992, with references to radio and newspaper coverage.
H. The organizers of the Sixth (1994) Conference, ‘Viruses, Vaccines and Vectors,’ (Division of Cell Biology, which included the erstwhile Department of Microbiology) decided to use it to celebrate FF's 80th birthday, which was due a few weeks after the conference. An unusually large number of overseas guests and their wives, most of them old and dear friends of Frank and Bobbie, attended, and there was much fuller media coverage than usual. Conference details and media attention to FF and to the conference are included in this file. Gordon Ada was responsible for the organization of the Conference. Papers here included are those relating directly to the conference and concurrent newspaper coverage of FF's birthday
1. Papers relating to the Conference, including First circular, Program, Note on conference in the ANU Reporter, Social Program, largely organized by my daughter, Mrs Marilyn Marshall, Guest list and seating for private dinner at Old Parliament House. Guest list and seating. Photograph and comment in Canberra Times, 28 November, 1994, Report on DA Henderson's public lecture on 28 November.
2. Book containing letters from many colleagues who attended the dinner.
3. Newspaper reports on FF on occasion of his 80th birthday celebrations, including the ANU Reporter, 23 November 1994, from interview taped by Kay Barney; feature article in The Canberra Times, by Simon Grose, 26-11-94; two letters to The Canberra Times; a feature article in The Australian by Julian Cribb and note in JCSMR Annual Report for 1994.
4. Photographs of the presentation of the ‘Grand Master of the Order of the Bifurcated Needle’ to FF by DA Henderson, at the dinner

5. Book: History of the John Curtin School of Medical Research.
Over a period of three years from 1999, I made donations of $20,000 annually to cover the cost of publication of 5,000 copies of this book (see 143/14/5N). The balance of some $8,000 available after the book was launched in November 2001 was transferred to the ANU Centre for Excellence to help fund Fenner Hall Scholarships.

6. Other Continuing Donations.
A. Fenner Hall (see file 143/22/5). In 1993 Bobbie and I decided to make small annual donations to Fenner Hall, to improve communal facilities such as the Reading Room and Common Rooms. By 1994 these donations totalled $10,000. In 19XX I began making larger donations to the ANU Endowment for Excellence Fund, which matches the income from the donated total, for scholarships for Fenner Hall. By the end of 2002 the donations amounted to $XXX,000
B. Nature and Society Forum (NSF). I had always felt guilty about my inability to become involved in community activities (my wife Bobbie more than made up for my deficiencies here), but had joined the Nature and Society Forum (a brainchild of my friend Stephen Boyden). I took some part in conferences that it organized, and in 1997 I was invited to become its Patron. In 1998 I decided to make annual donations to NSF to assist their work, usually of $20,000 annually. By the end of 2002 the donations totalled $141,000.
1. Summary of activities of the Nature and Society Forum, 1992-2002.
2. Invitation to become Patron of the NSF.
3. Email setting out details of donations.
C. Australian Society for Microbiology.
Starting in 1996, I have made annual donations to the ASM Research Trust. By the end of 2002 these totalled $15,500.

BOX 41
143/24. Oral and Video Tapes (for transcripts, see 143/10/5 and 143/14/5).
1. Oral recordings.
A. Tape of interview of FF by Prof. Fred Jevons of Deakin University in 1973, dealing mainly with my reactions to the book The Limits to Growth.
B. Tape of A. W. T. Edwards Oration, ‘The Life and Times of Sir Macfarlane Burnet’, delivered by FF at the 1987 Annual Scientific Meeting of the Australian Society for Medical Research (see also files 143/14/2E3 and 143/14/3G3).
C. Tape of ABC ‘Health Report’ 13/88 (28 March 1988), containing several interviews including one with FF, just after the award of the Japan Prize for smallpox eradication.
D. Four double-sided audio tapes of interviews of FF by Daniel Connell for the Australian National University, on 22 and 29 May 1990. Dealing mainly with history of FF's career in the ANU (edited transcript, file 143/14/5).
2. Video recordings.
A. The Academy holds two videos made by Dr Max Blythe of Oxford Brookes University, in 1992 and 1993. The interviews outline FF's scientific career (edited transcript in file 143/14/5B).
B. Acceptance speech for use at the time of the award of the Albert Einstein World Award for Science in November 2000 (see file 143/14/2N). This was an hour-long TV interview, without the help of an interviewer, and was designed to cover my scientific life story.
C. Video of FF giving a lecture ‘The Life and Times of Sir Macfarlane Burnet’ at the Centenary celebrations of the National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, on 12 May 1987. (Text similar to lecture in file 143/14/3G3).
D. Lecture at the US National Institutes of Health, at the 80th anniversary of the birth of Albert Sabin, 26 August 1986 (see 143/14/3F2).
E. German documentary on rabbits, in which FF discusses myxomatosis.
F. ABC Channel 2 Snapshot, 6.55 pm on 3 May 2001, made at a time when the History of the John Curtin School of Medical Research was approaching completion.
G. Videos made some weeks before but shown at the time of presentation of the five Science Prizes at Parliament House on 20 August 2002.
H. Video of presentation of Science Prizes at Parliament House on 20 August 2002.

INDEX TO PHOTOGRAPHS
BASSER LIBRARY MS 143, FENNER, FRANK JOHN, FAA
These archives contain a number of glossy prints of photographs of scientists in three books, Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests, History of Microbiology in Australia and The John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1948 – 1998, and are classified accordingly. ‘General’ represents photographs of myself, solo or with others, and parents and siblings.

General (other than in books)
Fenner, Bobbie 8
Fenner, Charles (father) 1
Fenner, EL (mother) 1
Fenner, Frank (in group) 2, 3, 4, 14, 15, 16, 24, 31, 32,
34, 57-58, 66, 67, 75, 83
Fenner, Frank (solo) 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 14, 15, 24, 27,
33, 34, 40, 57, 66, 67
Fenner, Frank (with Bobbie) 8, 13
Fenner, Frank (with one other) 13, 32
Fenner, Frank (with parents and siblings) 1, 2

Glossy Prints of Photographs in Books
Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests
Aragão, H. de B. 22
Bull, L.B. 22
Calaby, J.H. 22
Capucci, L. 22
Clunies Ross, W.I. 22
Cooke, B.D. 22
Coman, B. 22
Cumpston, H.J.L. 22
Danysz. J 22
Day, M.F.C. 22
Delille, P.F.A. 22
Department of Microbiology 22
Douglas, G.W. 22
Dyce. A.L. 22
Edwards, J.W.E. 22
Fenner, F.J. 22
Fennessy, B.V. 22
Jacotot, H. 22
Joubert. L. 22
Kerr, P.J. 22
King, D.R. 22
Loir, A. 22
Macamara, A.J. 22
Marshall, I.D. 22
Martin, C.J. 22
Myers, K. 22
Mykytowicz, R. 22
Newland, N.P. 22
Newsome. A. 22
Parer, I.P. 22
Pasteur, L. 22
Ratcliffe, F.N. 22
Regnery, D.C. 22
Robinson. A.J. 22
Ross. J. 22
Rothschild, M.L. 22
Sanarelli, J. 22
Shepherd, R.H.C. 22
Shope, R.E. 22
Sobey. W.R. 22
Thompson, H.V. 22
Tyndale-Biscoe, C.H. 22
Wheeler, S.H. 22
Williams, C.K. 22
Williams, R.T. 22
Woodroofe. G.M. 22

History of Microbiology in Australia

Ackerman, V.P. 48
Ada, G.L. 47
Albiston, H.A. 49
Anderson, K.F. 49
Annear, D.I. 49
Asche, L.V. 53
Atherton, J.G. 47
Atkinson, N. 47
Baas Becking, L.G.M. 51
Bain, R.V.S. 51
Bald, J.G. 51
Bancroft, J. 46
Bayly, R.C. 50
Bazeley, P.L. 50
Beaton, C.P. 53
Bell, S.M. 48
Bellett, A.J.D. 51
Benn, R.A.V. 48
Bennetts, H.W. 50
Bergersen, F.J. 50
Best, R.J. 51
Bishop, R.F. 51
Black, R.H. 52
Blanden, R.V. 51
Borthwick, T. 46
Bottomley, R.A. 52
Bowen, G.D. 51
Breinl, A. 47
Brockwell, J. 51
Brown, A.D. 47
Buckle, G. 48
Bull, L.B. 48
Bull, R.J. 47
Burnet, F.M. 47, 51
Burrell, C.J. 51
Butler, H.M. 49
Cairns, H.J.F. 50
Callow, L.L. 52
Carne, H.J. 50
Catcheside, D.G. 48
Cherry, T. 47
Cheyne, I.M. 53
Christian, J.H.B. 48
Clark-Walker, G.D. 52
Cleland, J.B. 48
Clinton, K. 53
Cobb, N.A. 49
Connole, M.D. 52
Cooper, G.N. 47
Cooper, P.D. 51
Cottew, G.S. 50
Cowling, D.C. 49
Cox, G.B. 50
Cox, K.O. 53
Crossen, T.I. 53
Cruickshank, I.A.M. 52
Cumpston, J.H.L. 53
Cunningham, A.L. 48
Dalgarno, L. 51
Davidson, A.J.L. 48
Davis, G.H.G. 51
Dawson, D.J. 53
de Burgh, P.M. 47
de Crespigny, C,T.C. 49
Della-Porta, A.J. 52
Department of Microbiology, JCSMR 47
Derrick, E.H. 47
Dick, M.I.B. 52
Dickson, B.T. 48
Dilworth, M.J. 47
Dixon, S.F. 53
Dodd, S. 50
Doelle, H.W. 50
Doherty, P.C. 51
Doherty, R.L. 47
Dorman, D.C. 48
Duxbury, T. 53
DW Leslie, D.W. 49
Elder, J. 50
Ellis, D.H. 52
Faine, S. 47
Fairley, N.H. 53
Fazekas de St Groth, S.N.E.E. 51
Ferguson Wood, E.J. 51
Ferris, A.A. 48
Finlay-Jones, J.J. 53
Fish, S. 49
Fisher, S. 48
Flentje, N.T. 52
Ford, E. 53
Forgan-Smith, W.R. 49
Fornachon, J.C.M. 48
Forsyth, J.R.L. 48
Francki, R.I.B. 52
Fraser, L.R. 52
Frey, D. 52
Gardner, J.H. 48
Garner, M.F. 48
Garnett, H.M. 47
Garrett, S.D. 52
Gibbs, A.J. 52
Gibson, F.W.E. 50
Gilbert , G.L. 48
Gilruth. J.A. 48
Goldsmid, J.M. 53
Gorman, B.M. 52
Gray, D.F. 47
Gregg, N.A. 51
Gregory, T.S. 48
Griffin, D.M. 52
Griffith, I.P. 53
Grigg, G.W. 48
Group: Both, G.W., Underwood, P.A., Sleigh, M.J., Moss, B.A. 51
Group: Colman, P.M., Dopheide, Webster, R.G., Ward, C.M. 51
Group: Derrick, E.H., Mackerras, M.J., Mackerras, I.M. 48
Group: Johnston, K.G., Beveridge, W.I.B., Gallagher, C.H., 50
Egerton, J.R.
Group: Marzuki, S., Nagley, P., Linnane, A.W., Lukins, H.B. 52
Group: Vincent, J.M., Baird, K., Ward, L., Bunt, J.S., 51
McPhillips, J. Rovira, A.D.
Gust, I.D. 47
Gutteridge, N.M. 49
Hansman, D. 49
Harris, J.R. 53
Hart, L. 51
Harvey, K.J. 48
Hawkes, R.A. 51
Hayes, W. 50
Hayward , N.J. 50
Helms, K. 48
Heydon, G.A.M. 52
Holloway, B.W. 50
Holmes, I.H. 51
Hope, V.F. 53
Howard (neé Waltho), J.A. 53
Hynes, M.J. 52
Jack, I. 48
Jensen, H.L. 51
Johnson, R.H. 51
Cooper, P.D. 51
Joklik, W.K. 51
Kaminski, G.W. 49
Keogh, E.V. 50
Kerr, A. 51
Knox, K.W. 48
Kovacs, N. 49
Ladd, J.N. 51
Laver, W.G. 51
Lee, A. 50
Loir, A. 46
Love, D.N. 47
Lush, D. 50
MacGarvie-Smith, J. 50
Mackaness, G.B. 50
Mackenzie, J.S. 51
Mackerras, I.M. and Mackerras, M.J. 52
Mackerras, I.M. 47
Macleay, W.J. 46
Magee, C.J. 49
Mahoney, D.F. 48
Marshall, B.J. 50
Marshall, I.D. 51
Marshall, K.C. 47
Martin, C.J. 53
Maslen, M 52
McAleer, R. 52
McAlpine, D. 49
McCarthy, N.J 50
McCartney, J.E. 49
McDonald, P.J. 47
McClennan, E.Î. 47
Martin, E.M. 47
Mead-Briggs. A. 22
Millis, N.F. 52
Mims, C.A. 51
Mitchell, G.F. 52
Moller, W.J. 52
Moir, R.J. 51
Morahan, R.J. 49
Muller, K.O. 52
Murphy, A.M. 48
Murrell, W.G. 50
Mushin, R. 53
Noonan, M.G. 53
Nossal, G.J.V. 47
O’Connor, J.L. 51
Oxer, D.T. 50
Parker, C.D. 51
Pateman, J.A.J. 52
Pavillard, E.R. 49
Penfold, W.J. 50
Pitt J.I. 52, 53
Pittard, A.J. 47
Platt, A.E. 47
Pope, J.H. 47
Pound, C.J. 49
Pullar, E.M. 49
Ralph, B.J.F. 47
Rankine, B.C. 52
Reye, R.D.K. 49
Rich, G.E. 49
Ridley, M. 52
Rivett, A.C.D. 48
Robins-Browne, R. 51
Rodwell, A.W. 50
Rountree, P.M. 50
Rovira, A.D. 51
Rowley, D. 47
Rubbo, S.D. 47
Sabine, J.M. 51
Scott, W.J. 48
Skerman, V.B.D. 47
Stanley, N.F. 47
Shellam, G.R. 47
Salton, M.R.J. 47
Seddon, H.R. 49
Shipton, A.W. 52
Simmonds, J.H. 49
Simmons, G.C. 49
Smith, D.D. 48
Snowdon,.W.A. 48
Sorell, T.C. 48
Spradbrow, P.B. 51
St George, T.D. 51
Stanisich, V.A. 53
Steele, T.W. 49
Stewart, P.R. 53
Stubbs, L.J. 51
Studdert, M.J. 51
Swaby, R.J. 51
Symons, R.H. 52
Tapsall, J.W. 53
Taylor, J.K. 48
Tchan, Y.-T. 47
Tebbutt, A.H. 48
Thonard, J.C. 47
Tidswell, F. 46
Tolhurst, J.C. 48
Tonge, J.L. 49
Tosolini, F.A. 49
Trudinger, P.A. 48
Turner, A.W. 50
Vincent, J.M. 47
Waid, J.S. 47
Wake, R.G. 50
Walker, J. 52
Walters, L.S. 53
Warburton, M.F. 53
Warcup, J.H. 52
Ward, H.K. 47
Waterhouse, W.L. 52
Watson, I.A. 52
Samuel, G.G. 52
Webster, A.F. 52
Webster, R. 48
Westaway, E.G. 51
White, D.O. 47
Wicken, A.J. 50
Williams, F.E. 53
Wilson, M.M. 49
Wood, P.A. 53
Woodruff, H.A. 47
Wright, H.D. 47
Young, I.G. 50

The John John Curtin School of Medical Research. 1948-1998
Ada, G.L. 55
Albert, A. 54
Allan, J.E. 56
Andersen, P.O. 57
Ardlie, N.G. 56
Armarego, W.L.F. 56
Bain, S.A.F. 55
Baker, R.T. 56
Barlin, G.B. 56
Bellett, A.J.D. 57
Bishop, P.O. 55
Blanden, R.V. 55
Board, P. 55
Boyden, S.V. 55
Boyle, D.B. 56
Braciale, T.J. 56
Brown, D.J. 55
Buckley, K. 56
Bullier, J. 57
Bunker, A.F. 54
Bunyan, P.E. 55
Burch, W.M. 56
Cairns, H.J.F. 56
Catcheside, D.G. 54
Ceredig, R. 56
Chelvanayagam, G. 56
Clark, I.A. 57
Cleland, B.G. 57
Cliff, W.J. 55
Coggan, M.A. 56
Conlon, A.A.J. 54
Coombs, H.C. 54
Cooper, P.D. 56
Courtice, F.C. 54
Courtice, F.C., Whyte, H.M., Eccles, J.C. 55
Cox, G.B. 56
Crouch, M.F. 56
Curtin, J.J. 54
Curtis, D.R. 55
Delahunty, A.F. 57
Denborough, M. 55
Doe, W.F. 55
Doherty, P.C. 55
Doherty, P.C., and Zinkernagel, R. with their Nobel Prizes 55
Dreyer, B. 57
Duggan, A.W. 57
Dwyer, F.P.J. 54
Easteal, S. 56
Eccles at work 54
Eccles, J.C. 54
Eccles, R.M. 57
Edsall, J.T. 56
Ennor, A.H. 54
Fazekas de St Groth, S.N.E.E. 56
Fenner, F.J. 54
Fildes, J.E. 56
Finkel, A.S. 57
Florey, H.W. 54
Foster, P.S. 56
Gage, P.W. 55
Gibson, F.W.E. 55
Goddard, W.H. 54
Goodnow, C.C. 55
Gready, J.E. 56
Group: Eccles, J.C., Ennor, A.H., Albert, A., Fenner, F., Bunker, A.F. 54
Group: Florey, H.W., Oliphant, M.L., Firth, R.W., Hancock, H.K. 54
Hancock, R.R. 55
Hapel, A.J. 56
Hawkes, R.A. 57
Hendry, I.A. 57
Henry, G.H. 57
Hill, C.E. 57
Hirst, G.D.S. 57
Ito, M. 57
J.S. Coombs 57
Jans, D.A. 56
Jeffrey, P.D. 55
Johnson, R.T. 56
Johnston, G.A.R. 57
Joklik, W.K. 56
Kinns, H.R. 55
Kirk; R.L. 55
Kohonen-Corish, M.R.J. 56
Krogsgaard-Larsen, P. 57
Lacey, G. 57
Lafferty, K.J. 55
Laver, W.G. 56
Levick, W.R. 55
Llinas, R. 57
Lobigs, M. 57
Lodge, D. 57
Lundberg, A. 57
Macfarlane, W.V. 54
Mackaness, G.B. 54
Maddess, T. 57
Marshall, I.D. 57
Matthaei, K.I. 57
McCullagh, P.J. 56
McKenzie, H.A. 55
Mercer, E.H. 54
Mims, C.A. 56
Morris, B. 55
Morrison, J.F. 55
Müllbacher, A. 56
Murphy, F.A. 56
Nestel, P.J. 56
Nichol, L.W. 55
Nossal, G.J.V., Fenner, F., Ada, G.L. Blanden, R.V. 55
Ogston, A.G. 54
Paral, V., Westen, R., Butterworth, S. 55
Parish, C.R. 56
Pavli, P. 56
Perrin, D.D. 56
Porter, R. 55
Quinn, G.F. 55
Ramsay, A.J. 56
Ramshaw, I.A. 56
Redman, S.J. 55
Robinson, A.J. 57
Rosenberg, H. 55
Salter, C.A.B. 55
Sambrook, J.F. 56
Sargeson, A,M. 56
Sasaki, K. 57
Schmidt, R.F. 57
Sears, T.A. 57
Serjeantson, S.W. 55
Shelton, J.N. 56
Simeonovic, C.J. 56
Simon, M.M. 56
Simpson-Morgan, M.W. 56
Sinnett., P. 56
Smith, J.B. 55
Stone, J. 57
Strata, P. 57
Thibos, L.N. 57
Total staff of School in early 1953 54
Tremethick, D.J. 56
van Arkel, T. 57
Voorhoeve, P.E. 57
Waring, P. 56
Waring, P., Müllbacher, A 55
Warren, H.S. 56
Watkins, J.C. 57
Webster, R.G. 56
Whitten, W.K. 54
Wight, J.B. 54
Willenborg, D.O. 56
Willis, W.D. Jr. 57
Woodroofe, G.M. 56
Woodrow, G. 55
Wright, R.D. 54
Young, I.G. 55
Zinkernagel, R.M. 56

INDEX TO CATALOGUE
BASSER LIBRARY MS 143, FENNER, FRANK JOHN, FAA

Persons with whom FF conducted a substantial correspondence are indexed separately on pages 5 and 6.

General Index
Agency for International Cooperation in Health 58
ANU funding for my work on Smallpox and its Eradication 73
Aragao and myxomatosis in Australia 20
Archiving of WHO files on smallpox Eradication 72
Army experience, FF, Australia 5
Army experience, FF, Middle East 4
Army experience, FF, New Guinea and Islands 6
Army experience, FF, war records 3
Army experience, FF, Woodside 4
Australian Academy of Science: Committee on Fauna and Flora 77
Australian Academy of Science: Video-Archive Project 78
Australian donation to Smallpox Eradication Program 71
Basser Library, Australian Academy of Science 84
Biographies of Burnet 80
Biographies of Florey 79
Book: Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests 21
Book: Classification and Nomenclature of Viruses 27
Book: History of Microbiology in Australia 45-53
Book: Human Monkeypox 43
Book: Medical Virology, 1st Ed. 26
Book: Medical Virology, 2nd Ed. 29
Book: Medical Virology, 3rd Ed. 42
Book: Medical Virology, 4th Ed. 43
Book: Myxomatosis 21
Book: Portraits of Viruses 43
Book: Smallpox and its Eradication 71-75
Book: The Australian Academy of Science: The First Forty Years 53
Book: The Australian Academy of Science: The First Twentyfive Years 30
Book: The Biology of Animal Viruses, 2nd Ed. 26
Book: The John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1948 – 1998 13, 14, 15, 53-57
Book: The Orthopoxviruses 45
Book: The Production of Antibodies 12
Book: Veterinary Virology, 1st Ed. 41
Book: Veterinary Virology, 2nd Ed. 42
Book: The Biology of Animal Viruses, proposed 3rd Ed. 40
Books on virology 26
Botany Bay Project 31
Burnet Centenary Celebrations 81
Burnet, F.M. 12
Celebration of the fiftieth anniversary of my appointment to ANU 59
Chapter 1 of Smallpox and its Eradication, The Clinical Features of Smallpox 74
China, trip with Australian doctors, 1957 16
Committee on Nomenclature and Taxonomy of Viruses 26
Consultancy on risks of introducing myxoma virus into New Zealand 58
Crocker, W.R. 16
Declaration of the Eradication of Smallpox Eradication 67
Destruction of Variola Virus Stocks 69
Director, Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies 27-31
Director, John Curtin School of Medical Research 23-27
Discussions about structure and authorship of Smallpox and its Eradication 72
Donations 83
Fairley, N.H. 5, 6
Family history 1
Fenner (née Roberts), Bobbie, war records 7
Fenner Conferences on the Environment, Australian Academy of Science 84
Fenner Hall 86
Fenner Hall Scholarships 86
Fenner Medal for Research in Biology, Australian Academy of Science 84
Fenner Medal, John Curtin School of Medical Research 83
Fenner, Bobbie (née Roberts), awards 8
Fenner, Bobbie (née Roberts), marriage 7
Fenner, Bobbie, obituary notices 8
Fibroma vaccine controversy 19
Florey Centenary Celebrations 80
Florey Fund of John Curtin School of Medical Research 78
Florey Stone, Westminster Abbey 79
Florey, H.W. 13
Ford, E. 5, 6, 16
Frank and Bobbie Fenner Conferences on Medical Research, JCSMR 84
Frank Fenner Research Award, Australian Society for Microbiology 82
Funding for The John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1948 – 1998 86
Global Commission for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication 65
History of the Centre for Resource and Environmental Studies, 1967 to 1979 29
Honours and Awards 7, 12, 15, 24, 27, 31-34
House, Canberra Medallion 14
India, Colombo Plan trip 16
Informal Consultation on Monkeypox and Related Viruses 65
Intensified Smallpox Eradication Program 64-71
International Commissions for the Certification of Smallpox Eradication 66
IOM book: Assessment of Future Needs for Live Variola Virus 70
Keogh, E.V. 6, 12, 13
Launch of Smallpox and its Eradication 75
Lectures 17, 25, 28-29, 34-39
Malariologist 5-7
Marks of recognition of FF other than prizes or medals 82
Meetings of Editorial Board of Smallpox and its Eradication 73
Mycobacterium ulcerans 14
Myxomatosis in Australia 20
Myxomatosis in Europe 20
Myxomatosis 18–23
Myxomatosis, chapter in proposed and published books 23
Myxomatosis, conferences in Australia 20
Myxomatosis, CSIRO publications on 20
Myxomatosis, newspaper comments by FF 20
Nature and Society Forum 86
Newspaper reports and interviews 2, 3, 4, 8, 14, 15, 16, 17,
20, 24, 25, 27, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 38, 39-40,
59, 67, 68, 82, 85
Oral tapes 86
Other WHO publications dealing with smallpox eradication 71
Papua New Guinea Medical Research Advisory Committee 17
Pathologist, 2/2 AGH 6
Personal history, Frank Fenner, 1914 to 1932 1
Personal history, Frank Fenner, 1933 to 1939 2
Post-Smallpox Eradication Policy: WHO committee meetings 67
Professor of Microbiology, JCSMR, in Europe 13
Professor of Microbiology, JCSMR, temporary laboratories 14
Professor of Microbiology, JCSMR, Walter and Eliza Hall Institute 14
Proposed book: Death of a Disease; the Story of Smallpox Eradication 45
Proposed book: The Biology of Animal Viruses, 3rd Ed 40
Publication list, FF 1
Report on CSIRO Division of Human Nutrition 25
Report on Indonesian Medical School 16
Report on John Curtin School of Medical Research 25
Reprints and other material on ‘whitepox’ viruses 76
Reprints on cowpox virus 76
Reprints on monkeypox 77
Reprints on the clinical features of smallpox 76
Reprints on the epidemiology of smallpox 76
Reprints on the eradication of smallpox 77
Reprints on the history of smallpox 75
Reprints on the pathology and pathogenesis of smallpox 76
Reprints on vaccinia virus and vaccination 76
Reprints on variola virus 76
Reprints on variolation 76
Review of ACIAR project in China 58
Reviews: Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests 23
Reviews: Myxomatosis 21
Rockefeller Institute 13
Scientific Committee on Problems of the Environment (SCOPE) 30
Study Leave reports 16, 24, 27-28
Sunderland, S. 5, 16
Transcripts of radio interviews,1967 to 1972 24
Transcripts, radio and video interviews since 1980 40
Travel Diaries, Books 1 to 22 61-64
University Fellow, John Curtin School of Medical Research 31
Video tapes 86
Visiting Fellow, John Curtin School of Medical Research 31
Walter and Eliza Hall Institute 12, 14
WHO Advisory Committee on Variola Virus Research 69
WHO documents in WHO/SE, SE and SME series 70

Index of Correspondence
There was a great deal of correspondence involved with all books in which I had co-author(s) or was editor; most of this is file in association with the relevant books. The list below contains files in which there was usually substantial correspondence over a period of time.

Andrewes, C.H. 18
Arita, I. 58, 65, 72, 73
Baxby, D. 81
Blythe, M. 78
Book Biological Control of Vertebrate Pests, letters about 22
Book: History of Microbiology in Australia, letters about 46
Book: Medical Virology, letters about 26, 29-30
Book Myxomatosis, letters about 21
Book: Portraits of Viruses, letters about 44
Book: Smallpox and its Eradication, additional letters about 74, 75
Book: The Biology of Animal Viruses, letters about 17, 26
Book: The John Curtin School of Medical Research, 1948-1998, letters about 54
Book: Veterinary Virology, letters about 41, 42
Bull, L.B. 19
Burnet, F.M. 12, 18, 80
Burnet biographical memoir, letters about 81
Chapple, P.J. 18
Chilean scientists, on myxomatosis 19
Crocker, W.R. 81
Day, M.F.C. 18
Deck, S. 74
Destruction of variola virus stocks, letters about 69
Douglas, G 19
Downie, A.W. 82
Dumbell, K.R. 27, 68, 82
Dubos, R. 13
Esposito, J.J. 27
Family 4, 5, 13
Fantini, B. 21
Fauna and Flora Committee, letters about 77, 78
Fenner, E.M.B. (Bobbie) 8-12
Fennessy, BV 18
Florey, H.W. 78
Florey biographies, letters about 79
Gajdusek, C. 82
Gibbs, E.P.G. 41
Henderson, D.A. 45, 68, 69, 72, 73
History of smallpox, letters about 76
Jacotot, H. 19
Jezek, Z. 44, 45, 73
Jiang Yu Tu 67
Ladnyi, I.D. 73
Loveday, D. 74
Macnamara, A.J. 18
Mahy, B. 68, 69
Manning, R. 72
Martin, C.J. 19
Mexican scientists, on myxomatosis 19
Murphy, F.A. 41
Mycobacterium ulcerans, letters about 14
Myers, K. 19
Rabbit calicivirus disease, letters about 22
Ratcliffe, F.N. 19
Regnery, D.C. 19
Scientific Committee on Problems of the Environment (SCOPE) 30
Shope, R.E. 19
Sobey, W.R. 19
South American scientists, on myxomatosis 19
Walker, B. 19
White, D.O. 42, 43, 46
‘Whitepox’ viruses, letters about 76
Wickett, J. 74
Wood Jones, F. 2